Anda di halaman 1dari 248

ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Release 300

with HART Communications Option


(HART 5 and HART 6 Versions)
User Manual
Doc. No.: 34-ST-25-17
Revision Date: February 2012

Honeywell Process Solutions


Notices and Trademarks

Notices and Trademarks

Copyright 2011 by Honeywell Inc.


February 2012

While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may
be stated in its written agreement with and for its customers.
In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages. The information and
specifications in this document are subject to change without notice.
Honeywell is a U.S. registered trademarks Of Honeywell Inc.

"HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communications Foundation"
Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Honeywell Process Solutions


1860 West Rose Garden Lane
Phoenix, Arizona 85027

Patent Notice
This product is covered by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 4,520,488; 4,567,466; 4,494,183;
4,502,335; 4,592,002; 4,553,104; 4,541,282; 4,806,905; 4,797,669; 4,735,090; 4,768,382; 4,787,250;
4,888,992; 5,811,690; 5,875,150; 5,765,436; 4,734,873; 6,041,659 and other patents pending.

ii ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

About This Document

Contact Info
World Wide Web
The following lists Honeywells World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our industrial automation and
control customers.

Honeywell Organization WWW Address (URL/e-mail)


Corporate http://www.honeywell.com
Honeywell Field Solutions www.honeywellprocess.com
Technical Assistance Center ask-ssc@honeywell.com (e-mail)

Contact Information
For Europe, Asia Pasific, North and South America contact details see back page .

Telephone
Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below.

Location Organization Phone Number


United States and Canada Technical Assistance Center 1-800-423-9883
Customer Services 1-800-343-0228
For Outside United States Technical Assistance Center 001-215/641-3610

Release Information

Document Name Document ID Publication Date



ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Release 300 with HART
Communications Option
Part number changes 34-ST-25-17 February 2012

References
The following list identifies all documents that may be sources of reference for material discussed in this
publication.

Document Number Document Title


34-ST-25-14 ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter Users Manual

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual iii
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

Technical Assistance
If you encounter a problem with your ST 3000 Smart Transmitter, check to see how your transmitter is
currently configured to verify that all selections are consistent with your application.
If the problem persists, you can reach Honeywells Solution Support Center for technical support by
telephone during normal business hours. An engineer will discuss your problem with you. Please have your
complete model number, serial number, and software revision number on hand for reference. You can find
the model and serial numbers on the transmitter nameplates. You may also seek additional help by
contacting the Honeywell distributor who supplied your ST 3000 transmitter.

Problem Resolution
If it is determined that a hardware problem exists, a replacement transmitter or part will be shipped with
instructions for returning the defective unit. Please do not return your transmitter without authorization
from Honeywells Solution Support Center or until the replacement has been received.

Symbol definitions
The following table lists those symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions.

Symbol Definition

This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for
additional information. This symbol appears next to required information in the manual.

This WARNING symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for
additional information. This symbol appears next to required information in the manual.

WARNING: risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns the user of a potential shock
hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, or 60
VDC may be accessible.

ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for


handling electrostatic sensitive devices

Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth (green
or green/yellow) supply system conductor.

Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to
Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical
code requirements.

iv ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

Contents

Patent Notice.............................................................................................................. ii
Problem Resolution......................................................................................................................... iv
Before You Begin, Please Note........................................................................................................ xvi
Transmitter Terminal Blocks ......................................................................................................... xvi

Preface....................................................................................................................xvii

1 Introduction - First Time Users Only .................................................................... 1


Overview..............................................................................................................................................1
About this section.............................................................................................................................1
Section contents ..............................................................................................................................1
Glossary of terms and abbreviations: ..............................................................................................1
ST 3000 Smart Transmitters ...............................................................................................................2
About the transmitter........................................................................................................................2
Functional block diagram .................................................................................................................3
Series and model number data........................................................................................................4
ST 3000 transmitter family...............................................................................................................5
HART Communicator ........................................................................................................................7
Transmitter adjustments ..................................................................................................................7
Transmitter operator interface .........................................................................................................7
HART 5 or HART 6? ....................................................................................................................7
The HART Communicator Purpose ...............................................................................................7
Transmitter Order ................................................................................................................................8
Order components ...........................................................................................................................8
About documentation .......................................................................................................................8
Local Smart Meter Option ...................................................................................................................9
Smart meter assembly .....................................................................................................................9
Option availability...........................................................................................................................10

2 Quick Start Reference ....................................................................................... 11


Overview............................................................................................................................................11
About this section...........................................................................................................................11
Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly ..................................................................................12
Quick start-up tasks .......................................................................................................................12

3 Preinstallation Considerations ........................................................................... 13


Overview............................................................................................................................................13
About this section...........................................................................................................................13
Safety Integrity Level (SIL) ................................................................................................................13
CE Conformity (Europe) Notice.........................................................................................................13
About conformity and special conditions .......................................................................................13

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual v


Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter ...........................................................................................14


Evaluate conditions........................................................................................................................14
Temperature limits .........................................................................................................................14
Pressure ratings.............................................................................................................................16
Considerations for HART communicator.........................................................................................16
Guidelines ......................................................................................................................................16
Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option ...................................................................................16

4 Installation ......................................................................................................... 17
Overview............................................................................................................................................17
About this section...........................................................................................................................17
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter..........................................................................................................17
Summary........................................................................................................................................17
Dimensions ....................................................................................................................................17
Bracket mounting ...........................................................................................................................18
Mounting Transmitters with Small Absolute or Differential Pressure Spans .................................20
Flange mounting ............................................................................................................................23
Flush mounting ..............................................................................................................................24
High Temperature Transmitter Mounting.......................................................................................26
Remote seal mounting ...................................................................................................................28
Piping ST 3000 Transmitter...............................................................................................................30
Piping Arrangements .....................................................................................................................30
Transmitter location .......................................................................................................................31
Process connections......................................................................................................................32
Flange descriptions........................................................................................................................33
General piping guidelines ..............................................................................................................33
Installing flange adapter.................................................................................................................34
Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter ..............................................................................................................35
Summary........................................................................................................................................35
Wiring connections.........................................................................................................................36
Approval body requirements..........................................................................................................37
Lightning protection........................................................................................................................38
Process Sealing .............................................................................................................................38
Explosionproof Conduit seal ..........................................................................................................38
Output meter options .....................................................................................................................39

5 Getting Started................................................................................................... 41
Overview............................................................................................................................................41
About this section...........................................................................................................................41
Establishing Communications ...........................................................................................................41
Software compatibility ....................................................................................................................41
Upgrading HART communicator software ...................................................................................42
Connecting the communicator .......................................................................................................43
Starting communications................................................................................................................44
Making Initial Checks.........................................................................................................................45
Checking configuration data ..........................................................................................................45
Transmitter write protection option ................................................................................................46
Failure mode (Failsafe) alarm jumper............................................................................................46
Local smart meter display indications............................................................................................47

vi ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

6 Configuration ..................................................................................................... 48
Overview............................................................................................................................................48
About this section...........................................................................................................................48
Section contents ............................................................................................................................48
Configuration Overview .....................................................................................................................49
About configuration ........................................................................................................................49
Communicator and ST 3000 transmitter memories.......................................................................49
Copying transmitter configuration into nonvolatile memory...........................................................50
What to configure...........................................................................................................................51
Interface menus .............................................................................................................................52
Model 275 Communicator..............................................................................................................58
Model 275 Interface characteristics ...............................................................................................59
Symbols .........................................................................................................................................59
Model 375 Communicator..............................................................................................................60
Model 375 Interface characteristics ...............................................................................................61
Making changes with 275 Communicator......................................................................................62
Making changes with Model 375 Communicator...........................................................................63
Tag Entering a Tag Number ..........................................................................................................64
PV unit Selecting Unit of Pressure Measurement .........................................................................65
Range Values Setting PV URV and PV LRV.................................................................................66
Procedure for keying in LRV and URV ..........................................................................................66
Procedure for setting range values to applied pressure ................................................................67
Device Information.............................................................................................................................68
Output form options .......................................................................................................................70
About square root output ...............................................................................................................70
Square root dropout .......................................................................................................................71
PV damping Adjusting Damping Time ...........................................................................................72
SV units Selecting Secondary Variable units ................................................................................73
Poll addr Selecting Poll Address....................................................................................................74
Install Date Enter Install Date.........................................................................................................75
Disconnecting the Communicator .....................................................................................................75
Disconnection checklist..................................................................................................................75

7 Start-up.............................................................................................................. 76
Overview............................................................................................................................................76
About this section...........................................................................................................................76
Start-up Tasks ...................................................................................................................................77
About start-up ................................................................................................................................77
Procedure reference ......................................................................................................................77
Running Analog Output .....................................................................................................................78
Background....................................................................................................................................78
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................78
Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter ...........................................................................................80
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................80
Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter ....................................................................................82
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................82

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual vii
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

Liquid Level Measurement Vented Tank........................................................................................85


Procedure ......................................................................................................................................85
Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank ................................................................................87
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................87
Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter............................................................90
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................90
Pressure Measurement with AP........................................................................................................93
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................93
Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals ................................................96
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................96

8 Operation......................................................................................................... 101
Introduction......................................................................................................................................101
About this section.........................................................................................................................101
Accessing Operation Data...............................................................................................................101
Summary......................................................................................................................................101
Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers ....................................................105
Default failsafe direction...............................................................................................................105
Write protect option......................................................................................................................105
Procedure ....................................................................................................................................105
Writing Data in the Message Area...................................................................................................108
Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database ............................................................................109
Background..................................................................................................................................109
Procedures...................................................................................................................................110

9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release....................................................... 112


Introduction......................................................................................................................................112
About this section.........................................................................................................................112
Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics..................................................................................112
Power Up Diagnostics..................................................................................................................112
Electronics Temperature Tracking Diagnostics ...........................................................................113
Operating Voltage Diagnostics ....................................................................................................115
PV Tracking Diagnostics..............................................................................................................116
Meter Body Temperature Tracking Diagnostics ..........................................................................118
Static Pressure Tracking Diagnostics ..........................................................................................119
Calibration Records .........................................................................................................................120
Zero Trim Records .......................................................................................................................120
Correct LRV Records...................................................................................................................121
Correct URV Records ..................................................................................................................121
Process Variables Parameters........................................................................................................122
Electronics Temperature..............................................................................................................122
Static Pressure.............................................................................................................................122
Basic Setup Device Info ...............................................................................................................123
Install Date ...................................................................................................................................123
Model Number .............................................................................................................................123
Materials of Construction .............................................................................................................123

viii ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

Review Parameters .........................................................................................................................124


Install Date ...................................................................................................................................124
Power fail count ...........................................................................................................................124
Electronics Temperature..............................................................................................................124
% Service Life in Stress ...............................................................................................................125
% Service Life Used.....................................................................................................................125
Static Pressure.............................................................................................................................126

10 Maintenance .................................................................................................. 127


Introduction......................................................................................................................................127
About this section.........................................................................................................................127
Preventive Maintenance ..................................................................................................................127
Maintenance routines and schedules ..........................................................................................127
Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms .................................................................................127
Procedure ....................................................................................................................................127
Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA).....................................................................................130
About the PWA Electronics Board ...............................................................................................130
Replacing Meter Body .....................................................................................................................133

11 Calibration ..................................................................................................... 137


Introduction......................................................................................................................................137
About this section.........................................................................................................................137
Overview..........................................................................................................................................137
About calibration ..........................................................................................................................137
Calibrating Analog Output Signal ....................................................................................................138
Calibrating Range............................................................................................................................139
Resetting Calibration .......................................................................................................................142
Background..................................................................................................................................142
Procedure ....................................................................................................................................142

12 - Diag/Service Advanced Diagnostics ............................................................ 143


Introduction......................................................................................................................................143
About this section.........................................................................................................................143
Overview..........................................................................................................................................143
About Advanced Diagnostics.......................................................................................................143

13 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 145


Introduction......................................................................................................................................145
About this section.........................................................................................................................145
Troubleshooting Overview...............................................................................................................145
Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................................145
Troubleshooting tool ....................................................................................................................145
To access transmitter diagnostics ...................................................................................................145

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual ix


Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

Diagnostic Messages ......................................................................................................................146


Summary......................................................................................................................................146
Critical failures .............................................................................................................................146
Non-critical failures ......................................................................................................................147
Communication errors..................................................................................................................148
Interpreting Messages .....................................................................................................................149
Clearing Critical Status ....................................................................................................................151

14 Parts List........................................................................................................152
Replacement Parts ..........................................................................................................................152
About this section.........................................................................................................................152

14 Reference Drawings ...................................................................................... 173


Wiring Diagrams ..............................................................................................................................173
Contents.......................................................................................................................................173

Appendix A Smart Meter Reference ................................................................... 175


Introduction......................................................................................................................................175
About this section.........................................................................................................................175
Smart meter option ......................................................................................................................176
Smart Meter Set up......................................................................................................................176
Smart Meter Display ........................................................................................................................177
Display description.......................................................................................................................177
Smart Meter Specifications .............................................................................................................179
Operating conditions and specifications ......................................................................................179
Meter Display at High and Low Temperature Extremes..............................................................179
Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span).................................................................................180
Local zero and span option..........................................................................................................180
About local adjustments...............................................................................................................180
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons..................................................................................183
Using the Smart Meter .................................................................................................................183
Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration ..................................................184
Selecting Engineering Units.........................................................................................................185
Setting Lower and Upper Display Values ....................................................................................187
Setting Lower Display Values ......................................................................................................188
Setting Upper Display Values ......................................................................................................191
Setting smart meter display using the HART communicator.........................................................196
Using the Hart Communicator to Configure the Smart Meter Display.........................................196
Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration ..................................................196
Typical smart meter indications.......................................................................................................199
Operation error codes......................................................................................................................200
Meter/transmitter interaction............................................................................................................201
Transmitter power cycling ............................................................................................................201
Changing output conformity .........................................................................................................201

x ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

Appendix B Configuration Record Sheet ............................................................ 203


ST 3000 R300 Smart Transmitter with HART Communications ...................................................203

Appendix C Freeze Protection of Transmitters.................................................... 205


Problem........................................................................................................................................205
Possible Solutions/Methods ............................................................................................................205
Solution ........................................................................................................................................205
Sealing liquid method...................................................................................................................205
Purging.........................................................................................................................................207
Gas applications ..........................................................................................................................207
Mechanical (diaphragm) seals.....................................................................................................207
Electric heating ............................................................................................................................209
Steam heating..............................................................................................................................210
Superheated steam considerations .............................................................................................213

Appendix D Hazardous Area Classifications ...................................................... 215


Introduction......................................................................................................................................215
Reference information..................................................................................................................215
North American Hazardous Location Standards.............................................................................215
NEC and CEC electrical codes....................................................................................................215
Classes ........................................................................................................................................215
Divisions.......................................................................................................................................215
Examples .....................................................................................................................................215
Group classifications....................................................................................................................216
Methods of protection ..................................................................................................................216
Temperature classification ...........................................................................................................217
Intrinsically safe apparatus parameters .......................................................................................217
Associated apparatus parameters ...............................................................................................218
Entity concept ..............................................................................................................................218
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications....................................................220
IEC Classification of hazardous locations....................................................................................220
Zones ...........................................................................................................................................220
Groups .........................................................................................................................................220
Methods of protection ..................................................................................................................221
Temperature classification ...........................................................................................................221
Certification and conformity details..............................................................................................222
Enclosure Ratings ...........................................................................................................................224
NEMA and IEC Recognition ........................................................................................................224
IEC Classifications .......................................................................................................................224
IEC Designations .........................................................................................................................224
NEMA Standards .........................................................................................................................224
Process Sealing for Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2 and Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2,
Explosionproof Electrical Systems ..................................................................................................225
ST 3000, Smart Pressure Transmitters .......................................................................................225

Index ......................................................................................................................227

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual xi


Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

Tables

Table 1 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family ..............................................................................................................5


Table 2 Local Smart Meter Options ............................................................................................................................10
Table 3 Start-up Tasks Reference................................................................................................................................12
Table 4 Operating Temperature Limits (Transmitters with Silicone Fill Fluid DC200) .............................................15
Table 5 Transmitter Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) Ratings........................................................16
Table 6 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket ..................................................................................................18
Table 7 Zero Corrects Procedure for Transmitters with a Small Differential Pressure Span ......................................21
Table 8 Flush Mount Transmitter Installation .............................................................................................................24
Table 9 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter.............................................................................................28
Table 10 Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Processes ..................................................................................31
Table 11 Process Connections .....................................................................................................................................32
Table 12 Flange Description........................................................................................................................................33
Table 13 Installing Flange Adapter .............................................................................................................................34
Table 14 Wiring the Transmitter .................................................................................................................................37
Table 15 Starting Communications with Transmitter..................................................................................................44
Table 16 Reviewing Factory-Set Configuration Parameters .......................................................................................45
Table 17 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters ......................................................................51
Table 18 Entering Tag Number ...................................................................................................................................64
Table 19 Selecting Engineering Units .........................................................................................................................65
Table 20 Keying in LRV and URV .............................................................................................................................66
Table 21 Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures................................................................................................67
Table 22 Viewing/Entering Device Information Data.................................................................................................68
Table 23 Selecting Output Conformity........................................................................................................................70
Table 24 Adjusting Damping Time .............................................................................................................................72
Table 25 Selecting SV Temperature Units ..................................................................................................................73
Table 26 Selecting Poll Address..................................................................................................................................74
Table 27 Entering Installation Date .............................................................................................................................75
Table 28 Start-up Procedure Reference .......................................................................................................................77
Table 29 Using Transmitter in Constant-Current Source (Output) Mode ...................................................................78
Table 30 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement.....................................................................................80
Table 31 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement ...............................................................................83
Table 32 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank...............................................85
Table 33 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank........................................88
Table 34 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement .....................................................91
Table 35 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement. ..............................................................................95
Table 36 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement .........................................96
Table 37 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access ..................................................................................102
Table 38 Changing Default Failsafe Direction ..........................................................................................................106
Table 39 Changing Write Protect Jumper..................................................................................................................107
Table 40 Writing Data in the Message Area..............................................................................................................108
Table 41 Saving a Configuration Database ...............................................................................................................110
Table 42 Downloading a Configuration Database.....................................................................................................111
Table 43 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms.............................................................................................128
Table 44 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings .............................................................................................................130
Table 45 Replacing PWA ..........................................................................................................................................130
Table 46 Replacing Meter Body Only.......................................................................................................................133
Table 47 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode.......................................................................138
Table 48 Calibrating Measurement Range Correct LRV........................................................................................139
Table 49 Calibrating Measurement Range Correct URV .......................................................................................140

xii ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

Table 51 View Diagnostics........................................................................................................................................143


Table 52 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures .............................................................................146
Table 53 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non-Critical Failures .....................................................................147
Table 54 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Info Status......................................................................................147
Table 55 Other Error Messages .................................................................................................................................147
Table 56 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors...................................................................148
Table 57 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table ...................................................................................................149
Table 58 Resetting the Transmitter............................................................................................................................151
Table 59 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference....................................................................................154
Table 60 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 42 and Figure 43 ......................................................................156
Table 61 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 44 and Figure 45. .....................................................................157
Table 62 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 44 and Figure 45 ......................................................................160
Table 63 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 46. ............................................................................................162
Table 64 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for Narrow Profile Meter Body ...........................163
Table 65 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 47. ............................................................................................164
Table 66 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 48. ............................................................................................165
Table 67 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 49. ............................................................................................166
Table 68 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 50. ............................................................................................168
Table 69 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 51. ............................................................................................169
Table 70 Summary of Recommended Spare Parts. ...................................................................................................171
Table 71 External Wiring Diagrams..........................................................................................................................173
Table A-1 Description of Smart Meter Display Indicators........................................................................................177
Table A-2 Smart Pushbutton Description..................................................................................................................178
Table A-3 Smart meter specifications. ......................................................................................................................179
Table A-4 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments..............................................................180
Table A-5 Smart Meter Engineering Units Code ......................................................................................................184
Table A-6 Selecting Engineering Units .....................................................................................................................185
Table A-7 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display..........................................................................188
Table A-8 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display............................................................................191
Table A-9 Smart meter display setup using HART communicator .........................................................................197
Table A-10 Summary of Typical Smart Meter Indications. ......................................................................................199
Table A-11 Smart Meter Error Codes and Descriptions............................................................................................200
Table C-1 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems ...................................................................................212
Table C-2 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature Values .................................................................................213
Table D-1 Temperature Identification Numbers (NEC/CEC) ...................................................................................217
Table D-2 FM Entity Parameters...............................................................................................................................219
Table D-3 Temperature Identification Numbers (IEC)..............................................................................................221
Table D-4 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC Enclosure Classification ..................................224

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual xiii
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

Figures

Figure 1 Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter.........................................................................................2


Figure 2 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode of Operation. ....................................................3
Figure 3 Typical Communication Interface...................................................................................................................7
Figure 4 Typical ST 3000 Transmitter Order Components. ..........................................................................................8
Figure 5 ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter Option. .......................................................................................................9
Figure 6 Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation.........................................................................14
Figure 7 Typical Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted Installations........................................................................18
Figure 8 Leveling Transmitters ...................................................................................................................................21
Figure 9 Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation .........................................................................................24
Figure 10 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation .........................................................................................25
Figure 11 Typical Flange and Pipe Mounted Installations ..........................................................................................27
Figure 12 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation. .........................................................................29
Figure 13 Typical 3-Valve Manifold and Blow-Down Piping Arrangement. .............................................................30
Figure 14 Typical Piping Arrangement for NPT Process Connection ...................................................................31
Figure 15 Operating Range for ST 3000 Transmitters. ...............................................................................................35
Figure 16 ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Blocks ........................................................................................................36
Figure 17 Ground Connection for Lightning Protection..............................................................................................38
Figure 18 Typical Communicator Connections...........................................................................................................43
Figure 19 Write Protection and Failsafe Direction Jumper Location ..........................................................................46
Figure 20 Smart Meter Display with All Indicators Lit...............................................................................................47
Figure 21 Summary of Configuration Process.............................................................................................................49
Figure 22 Communicator and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories ...................................................................................50
Figure 23 HART 5 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary...........................................................................................53
Figure 23a HART 6 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary ...........................................................................................54
Figure 24 HART 6 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary...........................................................................................54
Figure 25 HART 5 275 or 375 Communicator Menu Summary ...............................................................................56
Figure 26 HART 6 375 Communicator Menu Summary ..........................................................................................57
Figure 27 Model 275 HART Communicator.............................................................................................................58
Figure 28 Model 375 HART Communicator.............................................................................................................60
Figure 29 Square Root Dropout Point .........................................................................................................................71
Figure 30 Typical Communicator and Meter Connections for Constant-Current Source (Output) Mode..................79
Figure 31 Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter .......................................80
Figure 32 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type Transmitter..................................82
Figure 33 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter and Vented Tank85
Figure 34 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter and Pressurized
Tank. 87
Figure 35 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type Transmitter..................................90
Figure 36 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP Type Transmitter...........................91
Figure 37 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type Transmitter..................................94
Figure 38 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter with Remote
Seals. 96
Figure 39 Location of Failsafe and Write Protect Jumpers on PWA.........................................................................106
Figure 40 Summary of Save and Restore Database Function....................................................................................109
Figure 41 GP/AP Process Head.................................................................................................................................128
Figure 42 Disassembly of DP Transmitter Process Heads from Meter Body............................................................129
Figure 43 Typical Range Calibration Hookup...........................................................................................................141
Figure 44 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference. .................................................................................153
Figure 45 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference. .................................................................................154

xiv ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

Figure 46 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Electronics/Meter End...................................................................155


Figure 47 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Terminal Block End ......................................................................155
Figure 48 ST 3000 Model STD110, STD120, STD125, STD130, STD170, STD904, STD924, STD930, STD974,
STG944, STG974 (Rev S or greater).................................................................................................................157
Figure 49 ST 3000 Model STG944, STG974 (Rev S or greater) .............................................................................160
Figure 50 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body ......................................................162
Figure 51 Series 900 Dual-Head GP Meter Bodies. ..................................................................................................164
Figure 52 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP/LAP Meter Body. ...................................................................................165
Figure 53 Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body.........................................................................................................166
Figure 54 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body. .........................................................................167
Figure 55 High Temperature Meter Body. ................................................................................................................169
Figure A-1 Smart Meter Display with All Indicators Lit...........................................................................................177
Figure A-2 Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments................................183
Figure C-1 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity Heavier Than Process Fluid. ..................206
Figure C-2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter Than Process Fluid.....................206
Figure C-3 Piping Installation for Gas Flow..............................................................................................................207
Figure C-4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seals.........................208
Figure C-5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seal.................................208
Figure C-6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating and
Control...............................................................................................................................................................209
Figure C-7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating Control.210
Figure C-8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating. .......211
Figure C-9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating. .............212

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual xv


Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note

IMPORTANT

Before You Begin, Please Note


Transmitter Terminal Blocks
Depending on your transmitter options, the transmitter may be equipped with either a 3-screw or 5-screw
terminal block inside the electronics housing. This may affect how to connect the loop wiring and meter
wiring to the transmitter. See Table 14 in Section 4 for the terminal block connections for each type
terminal. Section 13 provides additional wiring diagrams showing alternate wiring methods.

Electronics Electronics
Terminal Terminal
Housing Housing
Block Block
- SIGNAL +

SIGNAL
+
-

SIGNAL
+
-
L- +
-

TEST
TEST

+ -

METER
+

Internal Internal
Ground Ground
Terminal Terminal

3-Screw Terminal Block 5-Screw Terminal Block

xvi ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Preface - Before You Begin, Please Note

Preface
This preface is included for informational purposes only.
The latest release of the ST 3000 HART
6 Device is known as the Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release with the following Version
information:
Universal rev: 6
Field device rev: 5
Software rev: 36

This release will include the Advanced Diagnostics for the ST 3000 HART 6 device.
The advanced diagnostics features will help our customers to:

Reduce maintenance costs.

Know when maintenance is needed.

Know when maintenance was performed.

Know how hard a life the device has had.

Know what to order when a replacement is needed.


There are, in existence, software packages available at the systems level that perform some of these
functions but these packages take a lot of effort to set-up and maintain and largely go unused. The
advanced diagnostics for the ST 3000 pressure transmitter should be able to provide some of this
needed functionality without a lot of user effort.
Listed below are the available Diagnostics in the ST 3000 Transmitter:

Installation Date

Time in Service

Power Cycles

Last Power Up Time and Date

Terminal Voltage

Minimum Terminal Voltage

Minimum Terminal Voltage Date

Status bit indicates less than 10V at terminals

Electronics Temperature Tracking: (Min/Max, timestamp and duration for exceeding limits)

Meter Body Temperature Tracking: (Min/Max, timestamp and duration for exceeding limits)

Process Variable Tracking: (Min/Max, timestamp and duration for exceeding limits)

Static Pressure Tracking: (Max, timestamp and duration for exceeding limits)

Model Number

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual xvii
-

Materials of Construction

Stress Monitor

Service Life Expended

Calibration Time and Date

Zero Trim Time and Date

NOTE 1: The features listed above are not available in earlier versions of ST 3000 HART 6 devices or
any of the HART 5 Devices.
NOTE 2: Complete list of Advanced Diagnostics with the details is under the section : Advanced
Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release.

xviii ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
1 Introduction - First Time Users Only - Overview

1 Introduction - First Time Users Only

Overview
About this section
This section is intended for users who have never worked with our ST 3000 Smart Transmitter with
HART communications. It provides some general information to acquaint you with the ST 3000
transmitter and the HART communications interface.

Section contents
This section includes these topics:
ST 3000 Smart Transmitters Brief description of the ST 3000 transmitter form, functions and
identification.
HART Communicator Brief description of the communication interface used with the ST 3000
HART transmitter.
Transmitter order Describes the components shipped with a transmitter order.
Local Smart Meter Option Describes the smart meter options available with the transmitter.

Glossary of terms and abbreviations:


ET Electronics Temperature temperature inside of the electronics housing.
MBT Meter Body Temperature same as SV or process temperature.
SV Secondary Variable value is the same as process temperature or meter body temperature.
It is the temperature measured at the pressure sensor.
DP Differential Pressure.
AP Absolute Pressure.
GP Gauge Pressure.
SP Static Pressure same as the pressure on high side.
URV Upper Range Value as selected by end user.
LRV Lower Range Value as selected by end user.
UTL Upper Transducer Limit - Defines the highest acceptable value for the Transducer.
UTL = 2*URL (Units same as PV) for DP where SPAN cannot be greater than UTL
UTL = 1.5*URL (Units same as PV) for AP and GP where SPAN cannot be greater than UTL
LTL Lower Transducer Limit - Defines the lowest acceptable value for the Transducer.
LTL = -2*URL (Unit same as PV) for DP where SPAN cannot be greater than UTL
LTL = 0 (Units same as PV) for AP and GP where SPAN cannot be greater than UTL
URL Upper Sensor Range Limit Defines the maximum recommended value for the URV.
LRL Lower Sensor Range Limit Defines the minimum recommended value for the LRV.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 1


1 Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters

ST 3000 Smart Transmitters


About the transmitter
The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter comes in a variety of models for measurement applications involving one
of these basic types of pressure:

Differential Pressure

Gauge Pressure

Absolute Pressure
The transmitter measures the process pressure and transmits an output signal proportional to the measured
variable over a 4 to 20 milliampere, two-wire loop. Its major components are an electronics housing and a
meter body as shown in Figure 1 for a typical differential pressure model transmitter.

Electronics
Housing

Meter Body

Figure 1 Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter.

2 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


1 Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters

Functional block diagram


Besides the process variable (PV) output, the transmitter also provides its meter body temperature as a
secondary variable (SV) which is only available as a read-only parameter through the communicator
interface. See Figure 2.

Factory
Characterization
Data

Electronics Housing
Meter Body

DP or PP PROM
Sensor
Multiplexer

Temperature A/D Microprocessor D/A Proportional 4 to


Sensor
20 mA PV output.
Static Pressure (Digital signal
Sensor imposed during
HART interface
Digital I/O communications)

Modular Electronics Terminal Block

Pressure

Figure 2 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode of Operation.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 3


1 Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters

Series and model number data


Honeywells line of ST 3000 Smart Transmitters includes these two series designations:

Series 100 Series 900

Each series includes several models to meet various process pressure measurement and interface
requirements. Each transmitter comes with a nameplate located on the top of the electronics housing that
lists its given model number. The model number format consists of a Key Number with several Table
selections as shown below.

n
io
at
y

ic
bl

ti f
m

en
se

Id
dy

As
pe

Bo
Ty

ns

y
ge

or
er

io
sic

an

ct
et

pt

Fa
Fl
Ba

O
Key Number Table I Table II Table III Table IV
S T D 1 2 0 E 1 H 0 0 0 0 0 S B, 1 C XXXX

You can quickly identify what series and basic type of transmitter you have from the third and fourth digits
in the key number. The letter in the third digit represents one of these basic transmitter types:
A = Absolute Pressure
D = Differential Pressure
F = Flange Mounted
G = Gauge Pressure
R = Remote Seals
The number in the fourth digit matches the first digit in the transmitter Series. Thus, a 1 means the
transmitter is a Series 100 and a 9 is a Series 900.
For a complete breakdown of the Table selections in your model number, please refer to the appropriate
Specification and Model Selection Guide that is provided as a separate document.

ATTENTION

Be aware that previous vintages of the ST 3000 transmitter with designations of Series 100,
Series 100e, Series 600, and Series 900 have been supplied at various times since the
ST 3000 was introduced in 1983. While all these transmitters are functionally alike, there are
differences in housing and electronics design.

This manual only applies for Series 100, Release 300 and Series 900, Release 300
transmitters furnished with the HART communications option (HART 5 ad HART 6).
Release 300 transmitters can be identified by the R300 designation on the nameplate.

4 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


1 Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters

ST 3000 transmitter family

Table 1 illustrates the various ST 3000 Release 300 pressure transmitters that are presently available.

Table 1 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family

Transmitter Type Series 100 Model Series 900 Model

Differential
Pressure STD1xx STD9xx

Differential Pressure
with Flange on One STF1xx STF9xx
Side

Dual-Head Gauge Not Available STG9xx


Pressure

In-Line Gauge
Pressure and STG1xL STG9xL
Absolute
STA1xL STA9xL

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 5


1 Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters

Transmitter Type Series 100 Model Series 900 Model

Gauge and Absolute STG1xx STG9xx


Pressure
STA1xx STA9xx

Flange-Mount STF1xx STF9xx


Liquid Level

Differential Pressure STR1xx STR9xx


with Remote
Diaphragm Seals

Flush Mount
Not Available STG93P

STG14T Not Available


High Temperature
STF14T

6 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


1 Introduction - First Time Users Only - HART Communicator

HART Communicator
Transmitter adjustments
Except for optional local zero and span adjustments, the ST 3000 has no physical adjustments. You need a
HART communicator to make any adjustments in a ST 3000 with the HART communications option.

Transmitter operator interface


The HART communicator (Model 275 or Model 375) is connected to the loop wiring of the ST 3000
transmitter for direct communication with the transmitter. The hand-held communicator talks with a
transmitter through serial digital signals over the 4 to 20 milliampere line used to power the transmitter. A
request/response format is the basis for the communication operation. The transmitters microprocessor
receives a communication signal from the communicator, identifies the request, and sends a response
message.
Figure 3 shows a simplified view of the communication interface provided by the communicator.

Request
Power
Supply and
4 to 20 mA line Receiver

Response

HART
Communicator
ST 3000

Figure 3 Typical Communication Interface

HART 5 or HART 6?
Model 275 is compatible with HART 5 only; Model 375 is compatible with HART 5 and HART 6.

The HART Communicator Purpose


The communicator allows you to adjust transmitter values, or diagnose potential problems from a remote
location such as the control room. You use the communicator to:
Configure: Define and enter the transmitters operating parameters.
Monitor: Read the input pressure to the transmitter in engineering units and the transmitters output in
milliamperes or percent.
Display: Retrieve and display data from the transmitter or the communicators memory.
Check current output: Use the transmitter to supply the output current desired for verifying analog
loop operation, troubleshooting, or calibrating other components in the analog loop.
Troubleshoot: Check status of transmitter operation and display diagnostic messages to identify
transmitter, communication, or operator error problems.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 7


1 Introduction - First Time Users Only - Transmitter Order

ATTENTION

Throughout this manual, procedures are given on how to use the HART communicator to
configure, operate and troubleshoot the ST 3000 transmitter. Keystrokes and screen displays
for the HART communicator are referenced in these procedures. However, additional
information on communicator operation is found in the product manual supplied with the
communicator.

Transmitter Order
Order components
Figure 4 shows the components that would be shipped and received for a typical ST 3000 transmitter order.

Figure 4 Typical ST 3000 Transmitter Order Components.

About documentation
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 Users Manual, 34-ST-25-17: One CD is shipped with every
transmitter ordered and it contains all relevant ST 3000 documentation. This document provides detailed
information for installing, wiring, configuring, starting up, operating, maintaining, and servicing the ST
3000 transmitter. This is the main reference manual for the ST 3000 transmitter.

8 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


1 Introduction - First Time Users Only - Local Smart Meter Option

Local Smart Meter Option


Smart meter assembly
A Local Smart Meter and/or Zero and Span Adjust option comes as a separate assembly and is integrally
mounted on the transmitters Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA) mounting bracket within the electronics
housing. The meter option assembly includes a cable and plug assembly for mating with a connector on the
transmitters PWA. A meter end-cap that includes a window is supplied on the electronics side of the
transmitters housing so you can view the meter display with the end-cap installed. See Figure 5.

Electronics
Housing
Local Smart
Meter Option

Figure 5 ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter Option.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 9


1 Introduction - First Time Users Only - Local Smart Meter Option

Option availability
Depending upon your transmitter model, it can be equipped with one of the available integral local smart
meter and/or zero and span adjust options as shown in Table 2.

Table 2 Local Smart Meter Options

Option Description Available with Transmitter Series


100 900

Local Smart Meter only

VAR UPPER
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100 Yes Yes


UNITS

SET

LOWER
VALUE

Local Smart Meter with Zero and Span Adjustments

VAR UPPER
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100 Yes * Yes


SPAN UNITS

SET

ZERO LOWER
VALUE

Local Zero and Span Adjustments only

Yes * Yes
SPAN

ZERO

* Except draft range, Model STD110.

10 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


2 Quick Start Reference - Overview

2 Quick Start Reference

Overview
About this section
This section provides a list of typical start-up tasks and tells you where you can find detailed information
about performing the task.
This section assumes that the ST 3000 transmitter has been installed and wired correctly, and is ready to be
put into operation. It also assumes that you are somewhat familiar with using the HART communicator
and that the transmitter has been configured correctly for your application. If the transmitter has not been
installed and wired, you are not familiar with HART communicator operation, and/or you do not know if
the transmitter is configured correctly, please read the other sections of this manual before starting up your
transmitter.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 11


2 Quick Start Reference - Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly

Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly


Quick start-up tasks
Table 3 lists common start-up tasks for an ST 3000 transmitter using a HART communicator and gives an
appropriate section in this manual to reference for more information about how to do the task. The start-up
tasks are listed in the order they are commonly completed.

Table 3 Start-up Tasks Reference

Task Description Reference Section and Topic


1 Put analog loop into manual mode Appropriate vendor documentation for
controller or recorder used as a
receiver in analog loop with
ST 3000 transmitter.
2 Connect HART communicator to 5 Getting Started
transmitter and establish Establishing Communications
communications.
3 Check/set output form (Linear/Square 6 Configuration
Root). Pressure Transfer Function
4 Check/set damping time. 6 Configuration
PV damping
5 Check/set Lower Range Value and 6 Configuration
Upper Range Value. Range Values
(See Appendix A for setting range
values using local zero and span
adjustments)
6 Run optional output check for analog 7 Start Up
loop Running Analog Output
7 Check zero input and set, if required. 7 Start Up
See Steps 6 and 7 in Table 29.
8 Check transmitter status 8 Operation
Accessing Operation Data
9 Setup local Smart Meter, if applicable. Appendix A Smart meter reference
10 Write data in scratch pad memory, if 6 Configuration
desired. Device Information
11 Store all changes in the transmitter's 6 Configuration
nonvolatile memory. Configuration Overview

12 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


3 Preinstallation Considerations - Overview

3 Preinstallation Considerations

Overview
About this section
This section contains information that you should take into consideration before you install a new
transmitter. The topics in this section include:
Safety Integrity Level (SIL)
CE Conformity notice and special conditions for European installations.
Environmental and operating conditions, which cover operating temperature limits and overpressure
ratings for safe transmitter operation.
HART communicator interface conditions.
Operating conditions for transmitters equipped with the smart meter option.
Of course, if you are replacing an existing ST 3000 transmitter you may skip this section.

Safety Integrity Level (SIL)


The ST3000 HART Pressure Transmitter can be ordered with the optional Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3
Capability. Detailed description of this capability can be found in the ST3000 Safety Manual (34-ST-25-
31).

CE Conformity (Europe) Notice


About conformity and special conditions
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of 89/336/EEC, the EMC Directive.
Conformity of this product with any other CE Mark Directive(s) shall not be assumed.
Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual, and the following special conditions,
may invalidate this products conformity with the EMC Directive.
You must use shielded, twisted-pair cable such as Belden 9318 for all signal/power wiring.
You must connect the shield to ground at the power supply side of the wiring only and leave it
insulated at the transmitter side.

ATTENTION

The emission limits of EN 50081-2 are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to radio
and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30 meters (98 feet) to the
antenna(e). In special cases, when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity, the
user may have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic
emissions of this equipment.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 13


3 Preinstallation Considerations - Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter

Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter


Evaluate conditions
The ST 3000 transmitter is designed to operate in common indoor industrial environments as well as
outdoors. To assure optimum performance, evaluate these conditions at the mounting area relative to
published transmitter specifications and accepted installation practices for electronic pressure transmitters.

Environmental Conditions Vibration Sources


Ambient Temperature Pumps
Relative Humidity Motorized Valves
Valve Cavitation
Potential Noise Sources
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Process Characteristics
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Temperature
Maximum Pressure Rating

Figure 6 illustrates typical mounting area considerations to make before installing a transmitter.

Lightning
(EMI)

Relative
Humidity
Ambient
Temperature Large Fan Motors
(EMI)

Transceivers
(RFI)

Pump Meter Body


(vibration) Temperature 21003

Figure 6 Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation

Temperature limits
Table 4 lists the operating temperature limits for the various types of transmitters with silicone fill fluids.
See transmitter specifications for temperature limits of ST 3000 transmitters with alternative fill fluids.

14 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


3 Preinstallation Considerations - Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter

Table 4 Operating Temperature Limits (Transmitters with Silicone Fill Fluid DC200)

Transmitter Type and Model Ambient Temperature Process Interface Temperature

C F C F
Draft Range STD110 -40 to 70 -40 to 158 -40 to 70 -40 to 158
Differential Pressure
STD125 -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 85 -40 to 185
STD120, STD130, STD170 -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 125 -40 to 257
STD904, STD924, STD930,
STD974 -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 125 -40 to 257
Gauge Pressure
STG140, STG170, STG180 -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 125 -40 to 257
STG14L, STG17L, STG18L -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 110 -40 to 230
STG14T -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 150 -40 to 302
STG93P -15 to 65 5 to 149 -15 to 95 5 to 203
STG944, STG974 -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 125 -40 to 257
STG90L, STG94L, STG97L,
STG98L -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 110 -40 to 230
Absolute Pressure
STA122/12L -40 to 85 -40 to 185 See Specification Sheet
STA140/14L -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 80 -40 to 176
STA922/92L -40 to 85 -40 to 185 See Specification Sheet
STA940/94L -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 80 -40 to 176
STA17L/97L -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 80 -40 to 176
Flange Mounted
STF128, STF132, STF924, STF932 -40 to 93 -40 to 200 -40 to 175 -40 to 350
Pseudo-Flanged Head
STF12F, STF13F, STF92F, STF93F -40 to 93 -40 to 200 -40 to 93 -40 to 200
STF14F -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 85 -40 to 185
Gauge Pressure Flange Mount
STF14T -40 to 93 -40 to 200 -40 to 150 -40 to 302
Remote Diaphragm Seals
STR12D, STR13D, STR14G,
STR17G, STR14A See Specification Sheet See Specification Sheet
STR93D, STR94G -40 to 85 -40 to 185 See Specification Sheet
Process temperatures above 125 C (257 F) require a reduction in the maximum ambient temperature as
follows: Process Temperature Ambient Temperature Limit
150 C (302 F) 50 C (122 F)
140 C (284 F) 60 C (140 F)
125 C (257 F) 85 C (185 F)
Process temperatures above 65 C (149 F) require a 1:1 reduction in maximum ambient temperature.

Note: For transmitters with local meter option see Appendix A

Note: Transmitters with other fill fluids (CTFE, Neobee, Etc.) have different Operating Temperature Limits. For
more specific information, refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection Guide or transmitter
nameplate

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 15


3 Preinstallation Considerations - Considerations for HART communicator

Pressure ratings
Table 5 lists maximum working pressure for a given transmitter Upper Range Limit (URL). The maximum
allowable working pressure (MAWP) is the pressure used for the approval body safety calculations
Table 5 Transmitter Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) Ratings
Transmitter Upper Range Limit Maximum Allowable Overpressure Rating
Model Working Pressure (Note 1)
(Note 1)
Previous New Design Previous New Design
STD110 10 inches H2O 50 psi 50 psi 50 psi 50 psi
(25 mbar) (3.5 bar) (3.5 bar) (3.5 bar) (3.5 bar)
STD120, 400 inches H2O 3,000 psi 4,500 psi 3,000 psi 4,500 psi
STD904, (1 bar) (207 bar) (310 bar) (207 bar) (310 bar)
STD924
STD125 600 inches H2O 3,000 psi 4,500 psi 3,000 psi 4,500 psi
(1.5 bar) (207 bar) (310 bar) (207 bar) (310 bar)
STD130, 100 psi 3,000 psi 4,500 psi 3,000 psi 4,500 psi
STD930 (7 bar) (207 bar) (310 bar) (207 bar) (310 bar)
STD170, 3,000 psi 3,000 psi 4,500 psi 3,000 psi 4,500 psi
STD974 (207 bar) (207 bar) (310 bar) (207 bar) (310 bar)
STG944 500 psi 500 psi 500 psi 500 psi 500 psi
(35 bar) (35 bar) (35 bar) (35 bar) (35 bar)
STG974 3,000 psi 3,000 psi 3,000 psi 3,000 psi 3,000 psi
(207 bar) (207 bar) (207 bar) (207 bar) (207 bar)
Note 1 Maximum Allowable Working Pressure and Overpressure Rating may vary with materials of
construction and with process temperature. For more specific information, refer to the appropriate
Specification and Model Selection Guide. In transmitters with Graphite Gaskets, rating of 50 psi remains
unchanged while ratings of 4,500 psi are reduced to 3,625 psi (250 bar). Flange Adapters with Graphite
Gaskets have a 3,000 psi rating.
Note 2: To convert bar values to kilopascals (kPa), multiply by 100. For example, 3.5 bar equals 350 kPa.

Considerations for HART communicator


Guidelines
When using the communicator to communicate with the transmitter:
Be sure the power supply voltage does not exceed 42 Vdc (30 Vdc for intrinsically safe loops).
Be sure there is at least 250 ohms of resistance between the communicator and the power supply for
proper communication.
Refer to communicator product manual for such information as operating limits.

Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option


If your transmitter is to be installed and operated with one of the integral smart meter options, please note
the Smart meter specifications and operating conditions for the meter located in Appendix A of this
manual.

16 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


4 Installation - Overview

4 Installation

Overview
About this section
This section provides information about installing the ST 3000 transmitter. The topics in this section
include:

Mounting the ST 3000 transmitter - various mounting methods are described and can be used
depending upon the transmitter type.

Piping the transmitter to the process connecting the transmitter meter body to the process piping or
tank connection.

Wiring the transmitter connecting the loop wiring and ground conductors to the transmitter, and
information is given on connecting local and remote indicating meters to the transmitter.

Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter


Summary
You can mount all transmitter models (except flush mount models and those with integral flanges) to a
2-inch (50 millimeter) vertical or horizontal pipe using our optional angle or flat mounting bracket, or a
bracket of your own. Flush mount models are mounted directly to the process pipe or tank by a 1 weld
nipple. Those models with integral flanges are supported by the flange connection.
Figure 7 shows typical bracket mounted and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison.

Dimensions
Detailed dimension drawings for given transmitter series and types are listed in Section 13 in this manual
for reference. Note that abbreviated overall dimensions are also shown in the specification sheets for the
given transmitter models.
The procedures following assume that the mounting dimensions have already been taken into account and
the mounting area can accommodate the transmitter.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 17


4 Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter

Angle
Mounting Flat
Bracket Mounting
Bracket

Horizontal Pipe

Tank
Wall

Flange Transmitter
Connection Flange

Figure 7 Typical Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted Installations

Bracket mounting
Table 6 summarizes typical steps for mounting a transmitter to a bracket.

Table 6 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket

Step Action

1 If you are using an


Optional mounting bracket, then go to Step 2.
Existing mounting bracket, then go to Step 3.

18 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


4 Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter

Step Action

2 Position bracket on 2-inch (50.8 mm) horizontal or vertical pipe, and install U bolt around pipe
and through holes in bracket. Secure with nuts and lockwashers provided.
Example - Angle mounting bracket secured to horizontal or vertical pipe.

Nuts and
Nuts and Lockwashers
Lockwashers

Mounting
Bracket

U-Bolt
Mounting
Bracket

Horizontal Pipe

Vertical Pipe
U-Bolt

3 Align appropriate mounting holes in transmitter with holes in bracket and secure with bolts and
washers provided.
If transmitter is
DP type with double-ended process heads and/or remote seals, then use alternate
mounting holes in end of heads
GP or AP with single-ended head, then use mounting holes in side of meter body.

In-line GP or AP, then use smaller U bolt provided to attach meter body to bracket. See
figure below.
Dual-head GP or AP, then use mounting holes in end of process head.

Inline Models

Meter Body

Smaller
U bolt
Use bracket for
hexagonal meter body

Note: If the meter body is hexagonal, you must use the additional bracket supplied. If meter
body is round, discard the bracket.

4 Loosen set screw on outside neck of transmitter one full turn. Rotate electronics housing in
maximum of 180 degree increment in left or right direction from center to position you require

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 19


4 Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter

Step Action
and tighten set screw (13 to 15 lb-in/1.46 to 1.68 N.m).
Example - Rotating electronics housing.

Electronics
Housing
180 degrees
max. 180 degrees
max.
Set Screw

The metric socket head wrench kit supplied includes 2.5, 3, and 4mm size wrenches. You will
need the 4mm size wrench for the outside set screw.

Mounting Transmitters with Small Absolute or Differential Pressure Spans


To minimize positional effects on pressure measurement and calibration (zero shift), take the appropriate
mounting precautions that follow for transmitters with small pressure spans.

Absolute Pressure and In-line Transmitters


For absolute pressure and inline transmitters you must ensure that the transmitter is vertical when mounting
it. You do this by leveling the transmitter side-to-side and front-to-back. See Figure 8 for suggestions on
how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance.
Absolute pressure models

Center
Section

Process
Head

Position spirit balance on


center section of meter
body only.

20 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


4 Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter

In-line models

Mount transmitter vertically to assure best accuracy. Position spirit balance on pressure
connection surface of AP body.

Figure 8 Leveling Transmitters

CAUTION

The mounting position of a model STA122 or STA922 Absolute Pressure Transmitter or a


model STD110 Draft Range Differential Pressure Transmitter is critical as the transmitter
spans become smaller. A maximum zero shift of 2.5 mm Hg for an absolute transmitter or 1.5
in H2O for a draft range transmitter can result from a mounting position which is rotated 90
degrees from vertical. A typical zero shift of 0.12 mm Hg or 0.20 in H2O can occur for a 5
degree rotation from vertical.

Differential Pressure Transmitters


For a transmitter with a small differential pressure span (Model STD110, for example), you must ensure
that the transmitter is vertical when mounting it. You do this by leveling the transmitter side-to-side and
front-to-back. See Figure 8 for suggestions on how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance. You must
also zero the transmitter by following the steps in Table 7 below.

Table 7 Zero Corrects Procedure for Transmitters with a Small Differential Pressure Span
Step Action

1 Attach the transmitter to the mounting bracket but do not completely tighten the mounting
bolts.

2 Connect a tube between the input connections in the high pressure (HP) and low pressure
(LP) heads to eliminate the affects of any surrounding air currents.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 21


4 Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter

Step Action

3 Connect 24 Vdc power to the transmitter and connect a milliammeter in series in the loop
circuit to read the transmitters output current. See figure for typical connections.

Voltmeter
Precision
Milliammeter +
Differential Pressure Power
250
Type Transmitter ohms Supply
-
+
-
Field -
Terminals
Receiver
+

Communicator

4 Connect a communicator and establish communications with the transmitter. Follow the steps
in Table 15, if needed.

5 While reading the transmitters output on the milliammeter, position the transmitter so the
output reading is at or near zero and then completely tighten the mounting bolts.

6 Follow the steps below to do an input zero correct function using the communicator. This
corrects the transmitter for any minor error that may occur after the mounting bolts are
tightened.

7 Starting from Online menu, choose the following menu selections:


Device setup

Diag/Service

Calibration

Zero Trim

You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. Press OK.
You will be prompted that this procedure will affect sensor calibration. Press OK.
Press OK to initiate zero input corrects.
You will be prompted to return the loop to automatic control. Press OK

22 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


4 Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter

Step Action

8 Remove the tube from between the input connections, the power, and the milliammeter and
communicator.
If device is not Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release skip to step 13.

9* On the next prompt Please enter Calibration Date, enter the date in the format
MM/DD/YYYY (ex: 05/27/2009), then press Enter

10* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time in 24 Hr Clock format (Hour
field), enter the hour portion of the calibration time in the 24 Hr format HH (ex: 13), then press
Enter

11* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field), enter the Minutes
field MM (ex: 56), then press Enter

12* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time (Second field), enter the
Seconds field SS (ex: 56), then press Enter

13 When prompted, return loop to automatic control. Press Enter.

14 Continue with the remaining installation tasks.

*HART 6 Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release only with the Universal Rev 6, Field Device Rev
5 and Software Rev 36.
For details about these parameters refer to Diagnostics/Service - Calibration Records under the
Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release topic.

Flange mounting
Transmitters that are furnished with integral flange connections (models STFxxx), are bolted directly to the
process flange connection. Figure 9 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with the flange on the high
pressure (HP) side so the HP diaphragm is in direct contact with the process fluid. The low pressure (LP)
side of the transmitter is vented to atmosphere (no connection).
To mount a flange mounted transmitter model, bolt the transmitters flange to the flange pipe on the wall of
the tank.

ATTENTION

On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension.

Once the transmitter is mounted, the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired
position. See Table 6, Step 4 for details.

It is the End Users responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are
suitable for the transmitters service condition.
To prevent degradation of performance in Flush-Mounted Flanged Transmitters, exercise care to
ensure that the internal diameter of the flange gasket does not obstruct the sensing diaphragm.
To prevent degradation of performance in Extended Mount Flanged Transmitters, ensure that
there is sufficient clearance in front of the sensing diaphragm body.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 23


4 Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter

Attention: Dotted area indicates use


with closed tank with reference leg.

Maximum Level

Variable Reference
Head H1 Leg

Minimum Level

HP Side
mounted LP Side vented
to tank to atmosphere

Figure 9 Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation

Flush mounting
ST 3000 flush mount transmitters (model STG9xx) are mounted directly to the process pipe or tank using a
1 inch weld nipple. Figure 10 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with a flush mount on a pipe.
Follow the steps in Table 8 to install a flush mount transmitter.

Table 8 Flush Mount Transmitter Installation

Step Action

1 Cut a hole for a 1 standard pipe in the tank or pipe where the transmitter is to be mounted

ATTENTION

On insulated tanks and pipes, remove enough insulation to accommodate the mounting
sleeve.

2 Weld the 1 mounting sleeve to the wall of the tank or to the hole cut on the pipe

3 Insert the meter body of the transmitter into the mounting sleeve and secure with the locking
bolt

4 Tighten the bolt to a torque of 6,4 Nm+/- 0,30 Nm [4.7 ft.-lbs. +/- 0.2 ft.-lbs.]

5 Once the transmitter is mounted, the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired
position. See Table 6, Step 4 for details.

24 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


4 Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter

1" Pipe Mount -


316 SS Weld Nipple
(standard option)

Figure 10 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 25


4 Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter

High Temperature Transmitter Mounting


You can mount the high temperature transmitter directly to the process flange connection or the process
piping.

Figure 11 shows typical pipe and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison.
To mount a flange mounted transmitter model, bolt the transmitters flange to the flange on the wall of the
tank or process pipe.
It is the End Users responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are suitable for
the transmitters service condition.

ATTENTION

On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension.

Once the transmitter is mounted, the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired position.
See Table 6, step 4.

26 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


4 Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter

Figure 11 Typical Flange and Pipe Mounted Installations

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 27


4 Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter

Remote seal mounting


ST 3000 transmitters furnished with remote diaphragm seals (models STRxxx) can be mounted using the
optional mounting brackets. (See procedure in Table 6 in this section for bracket mounting.) Follow the
guidelines below to determine the mounting position of the remote seals for the given fill fluid and then use
the procedure in Table 9 to mount the remote seals to the process connections.
Figure 12 shows a typical installation for a remote diaphragm seal transmitter for reference.

WARNING

Mount the remote seal flanges within the limits stated below for the given fill-fluid in the
capillary tubes.

IF the fill fluid is THEN mount the flange


Silicone DC 200 Oil no greater than 22 feet (6.7 meters) below the transmitter.
Silicone DC 704 Oil no greater than 19 feet (5.8 meters) below the transmitter.
Chlorotrifluorethylene (CTFE) no greater than 11 feet (3.4 meters) below the transmitter.

NOTE: The combination of tank vacuum and high pressure capillary head effect should not exceed 9 psi
(300 mm Hg) absolute.

Table 9 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter

Step Action

1 Mount transmitter at a remote distance determined by length of capillary tubing.

2 To measure variable head H1, mount remote seals on tank walls as follows:
If Transmitter Model Number is
STR93D or STR12D, then connect remote seal on high pressure (HP) side of
transmitter to either the lower flange or the upper flange.
If Transmitter Model Number is
STR13D, the remote seal on low pressure (LP) side of transmitter must be connected
to lower flange.
See Figure 12.

ATTENTION

On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension.

3 It is the End Users responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are
suitable for the transmitters service condition

28 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


4 Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter

LP Side
- Model STR93D
- Model STR12D

HP Side
- Model STR13D

Maximum Level

H2
Fixed Variable
Ref. Leg Head H1

Minimum Level

HP Side
- Model STR93D
- Model STR12D

LP Side
- Model STR13D

Figure 12 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 29


4 Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter

Piping ST 3000 Transmitter


Piping Arrangements
The actual piping arrangement will vary depending upon the process measurement requirements and the
transmitter model. Except for flush, flanged and remote diaphragm seal connections, process connections
are made to or NPT female connections in the process head of the transmitters meter body. For
example, a differential pressure transmitter comes with double-ended process heads with NPT
connections but they can be modified to accept inch NPT through optional flange adapters. Some gauge
pressure transmitters may have a NPT connection that mounts directly to a process pipe.
The most common type of pipe used is schedule 80 steel pipe. Many piping arrangements use a three-
valve manifold to connect the process piping to the transmitter. A manifold makes it easy to install and
remove or rezero a transmitter without interrupting the process. It also accommodates the installation of
blow-down valves to clear debris from pressure lines to the transmitter.
Figure 13 shows a diagram of a typical piping arrangement using a three-valve manifold and blow-down
lines for a differential pressure transmitter being used to measure flow.

To Downstream Tap To Upstream Tap

Blow-Down 3-Valve Blow-Down


Valve Manifold Valve

Blow-Down Blow-Down
Piping Piping

To Low Pressure To High Pressure


Side of Transmitter Side of Transmitter

To Waste To Waste
21010

Figure 13 Typical 3-Valve Manifold and Blow-Down Piping Arrangement.

Another piping arrangement uses a block-off valve and a tee connector in the process piping to the
transmitter as shown in Figure 14.

30 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


4 Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter

Tank Wall
1/2" NPT
Connection

Block-off Valve

Figure 14 Typical Piping Arrangement for NPT Process Connection

Transmitter location
Table 10 lists the mounting location for the transmitter depending on the process.

Table 10 Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Processes

Process Suggested Location Explanation


Liquids 1. Below but close to the 1. This minimizes the static
elevation of the process head effect of the
connection. condensate.

2. Level with or above the 2. This requires a siphon to


process connection. protect the transmitter from
process steam. The siphon
retains water as a fill fluid.
Gases Above the gas line The condensate drains away
from the transmitter

ATTENTION

For liquid or steam, the piping should slope a minimum of 25.4 mm (1 inch) per 305 mm (1
foot). Slope the piping down towards the transmitter if the transmitter is below the process
connection so the bubbles may rise back into the piping through the liquid. If the transmitter
is located above the process connection, the piping should rise vertically above the
transmitter; then slope down towards the flowline with a vent valve at the high point.

For gas measurement, use a condensate leg and drain at the low point (freeze protection
may be required here). See Appendix C for some suggested freeze protection solutions.

ATTENTION

Care must be taken when installing transmitters on hot processes. The operating temperature
limits for the device (as outlined in Table 3) must not be exceeded. Impulse piping may be
used to reduce the temperature of the process that comes into contact with the transmitter
meter body. As a general rule there is a 56C drop (100F) in the temperature of the process
for every foot of 1/2" uninsulated piping.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 31


4 Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter

Process connections
Table 11 describes typical process connections for a given type of transmitter.

Table 11 Process Connections


Transmitter Type Process Connection

Differential Pressure Process heads with 1/4 NPT female connection.

Flange adapters and manifolds with 1/2-inch female connection are


optional.
Models with pseudo flange on one side include 2- or 3-inch ANSI class
150 flange.

Gauge Pressure Process head with 1/2 NPT female connection (Series 100).

In-line 1/2 NPT female connection (STGxxL).

In-line 1/2 NPT male

9/16 Aminco

DIN19213

Process heads with 1/4 NPT female connection (STG9x4).

Flange adapters and manifolds with 1/2-inch female connections are


optional (STG9x4).
2-inch Sanitary Tri-Clamp (STGxxT).

Flush mount in 1 weld sleeve, with O-ring and locking bolt (STGxxP).

Absolute Pressure Process head with 1/2 NPT female connection. (STAx22, x40, STAx2L,
STA4xL)
In-line NPT female

In-line NPT male

9/16 Aminco

DIN19213

Flange Mounted Small flange 1/2-inch, 1-, 1 - and 2-inch (STFxxT)


Liquid Level
2, 3- or 4-inch flange with flush or 2-, 4- or 6-inch extended diaphragm (See
Table 12) on high pressure side.*
DN 50, 80, or 100 PN 40 flange with flush or 2, 4 or 6 inch extended
diaphragm (See Table 12) on High Pressure Side*.

Remote Diaphragm See model selection guide for description of available flanged, threaded,
Seals chemical tee, saddle, and sanitary process connections.

* Reference side has standard differential pressure process head.

32 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


4 Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter

Flange descriptions
Table 12 describes the available flange connections for flange mounted liquid level transmitters.

Table 12 Flange Description


Diaphragm Type Description
Flush or Extended 2-inch 150# serratedface flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 120.7 mm
Diaphragm (4.75 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 150 mm (5.91 in).
2-inch 150# serratedface flange with 8 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 127 mm
(5.00 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm (6.50 in).
3-inch 150# serratedface flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 152.4 mm
(6.00 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm (7.48 in).
3-inch 300# serratedface flange with 8 holes 22.2 mm (7/8 in) diameter on 168.3
mm (6.62 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 210 mm (8.27 in).
4-inch 150# serratedface flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 190.5
mm (7.50 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 230 mm (9.05 in).
4-inch 300# serratedface flange with 8 holes 22.2 mm (7/8 in) diameter on 255 mm
(10.04 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm (7.87 in).
DN 50 PN 40 serratedface flange with 4 holes 18 mm (0.71 in) diameter on 125
mm (4.92 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm (6.50 in).
DN 80 PN 40 serratedface flange with 8 holes 18 mm (0.71 in) diameter on 160
mm (6.30 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm (7.87 in).
DN 100 PN 40 serratedface flange with 8 holes 22 mm (0.87 in) diameter on 190
mm (7.48 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 235 mm (9.25 in).

Pseudo Flange Head 2-inch, 150 lbs serrated-face flange with 4 holes 15.9 mm (5/8 in) diameter on
120.6 mm (4-3/4 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 152.4 mm (6 in).

3-inch, 150 lbs serrated-face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on
152 mm (6 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm (7-1/2 in).

Flush Mount 25.4 mm (1-inch) pipe mount. (316L SS standard option.)


Gauge STG93P

General piping guidelines


When measuring fluids containing suspended solids, install permanent valves at regular intervals to
blow-down piping.

Blow-down all lines on new installations with compressed air or steam and flush them with process
fluids (where possible) before connecting these lines to the transmitters meter body.

Be sure all the valves in the blow-down lines are closed tight after the initial blow-down procedure
and each maintenance procedure after that.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 33


4 Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter

Installing flange adapter


Table 13 gives the steps for an optional flange adapter on the process head.
ATTENTION

Slightly deforming the gasket supplied with the adapter before you insert it into the adapter
may aid in retaining the gasket in the groove while you align the adapter to the process head.
To deform the gasket, submerse it in hot water for a few minutes then firmly press it into its
recessed mounting groove in the adapter.

Table 13 Installing Flange Adapter

Step Action

1 Insert filter screen (if supplied) into inlet cavity of process head.

2 Carefully seat Teflon (white) gasket into adapter groove.

3 Thread adapter onto 1/2-inch process pipe and align mounting holes in adapter with holes in
end of process head as required.

4 Secure adapter to process head by hand tightening 7/16-20 hex-head bolts.


Example - Installing adapter on process head.

Process
Head

Filter Screen
Teflon Gasket

Flange Adapter
21011
7/16 x 20 Bolts

ATTENTION

Apply an anti-seize compound on the stainless steel bolts prior to threading them into the
process head.

5 Evenly torque flange adapter bolts to a torque of 47,5 Nm +/- 2,4 Nm (35 Lb-Ft +/- 1.8 Lb-Ft)

34 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


4 Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter

Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter


Summary
The transmitter is designed to operate in a two-wire power/current loop with loop resistance and power
supply voltage within the operating range shown in Figure 15. When option LP (lightning protection)
and/or remote smart meter are selected, the voltage drop for these options must be added to the basic
transmitter voltage of 10.8 V to determine VXMTR and RLOOP MAX. Additional consideration is required
when selecting intrinsic safety barriers to insure that the barriers will supply VXMTR MIN including the
required 250 ohms (typically within the barriers) for digital communications.
Transmitter Parameters:
RLOOP MAX = The maximum loop resistance (barriers plus wiring) that will allow proper transmitter
operation.

Therefore, RLOOP MAX = (VSUPPLY MIN VXMTR MIN) 21.8 mA


Where, VXMTR MIN = 10.8 V + VLP + VSM
VLP = 1.1 V, lightning protection option, LP
VSM = 2.3 V, remote smart meter
(Please note that VSM should only be considered if a remote smart meter
will be connected to the transmitter.)

1440

1200 = Operating
Area

NOTE: A minimum of
Loop 800 250 0hms of loop
Resistance resistance is
necessary to support
(ohms) communications. Loop
650
resistance equals
barrier resistance plus
450 wire resistance plus
receiver resistance.
Also 45 volt operation
is permitted if not an
250 intrinsically safe
installation.

0 10.8 16.28 20.63 25 28.3 37.0 42.4

Operating Voltage (Vdc) 21012

Figure 15 Operating Range for ST 3000 Transmitters.

The positive and negative loop wires are connected to the positive (+) and negative () SIGNAL terminals
on the terminal block in the transmitters electronics housing as shown in Figure 16.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 35


4 Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter

3-Screw Terminal Block 5-Screw Terminal Block


Lightning Protection Option (option LP)

Electronics Electronics
Terminal Terminal
Housing Housing
Block Block

- SIGNAL +

SIGNAL
+
-

SIGNAL
+
-
L- +

TEST
-
TEST

+ -

METER
-
+

Internal Internal
Ground Ground
Terminal Terminal

Figure 16 ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Blocks

Each transmitter includes an internal ground terminal to connect the transmitter to earth ground. A ground
terminal can be optionally added to the outside of the electronics housing. While it is not necessary to
ground the transmitter for proper operation, we suggest that you do so to minimize the possible effects of
noise on the output signal and provide additional protection against lightning and static discharge
damage. Note that grounding may be required to meet optional approval body certification. Refer to
Section 3, CE Conformity (Europe) Notice for special conditions.
Optional lightning protection (option LP) can be ordered for transmitters that will be installed in areas
highly susceptible to lightning strikes. Figure 17 shows the 5-screw terminal block used when the lightning
protection option is ordered.
Barriers can be installed per manufacturers instructions for transmitters to be used in intrinsically safe
applications.

Wiring connections
The procedure in Table 14 shows the steps for connecting loop power to the transmitter. For loop wiring
and external wiring diagrams, refer to the installation drawings presented in Section 13. Detailed drawings
are provided for transmitter installation in non-intrinsically safe areas and for intrinsically safe loops in
hazardous area locations.

ATTENTION

All wiring must comply with local codes, regulations, and ordinances.

If you will be using the transmitter in a hazardous area, be sure to review the hazardous
location reference data included in Appendix D of this manual before wiring and operating the
transmitter.

36 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


4 Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter

Table 14 Wiring the Transmitter

Step Action

1 Loosen end-cap lock using a 1.5 mm allen wrench and remove end-cap cover from terminal
block end of electronics housing.

2 Feed loop power leads through one of conduit entrances on either side of electronics housing.
Plug whichever entrance you do not use.
The transmitter accepts up to 16 AWG wire.

3 Observing polarity, connect positive loop power lead to SIGNAL + terminal and negative loop
power lead to SIGNAL terminal. See figures.

3-screw terminal block 5-screw terminal (option LP)

Loop Loop
Power
- SIGNAL +

Power

SIGNAL
+
-

SIGNAL
+
+ + -
- - L +

TEST
-

-+ -
TEST

METER
-
+

4 Replace end-cap, and tighten end-cap lock.

Approval body requirements


If your transmitter was ordered with Table III option 3N for self-declared approval per 94/9/EC (ATEX4),
you must use a power supply that includes a voltage limiting device that will keep the voltage to the
transmitter from exceeding 42 Vdc. You can achieve this by using a battery as the supply or one of these
voltage limiting means.

Double wound mains transformer per BS 3535 or equivalent.

An adequately rated zener diode whose voltage is not significantly higher than the rated voltage.

An adequately rated semiconductor voltage regulator.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 37


4 Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter

Lightning protection
When your transmitter is equipped with optional lightning protection (option LP), you must connect a wire
from the transmitter to ground as shown in Figure 17 to make the protection effective. We recommend that
you use a size 8 AWG (American Wire Gage) or (8.37mm2) bare or green covered wire.

Electronics
Housing

Connect to
Earth Ground

Figure 17 Ground Connection for Lightning Protection.

Process Sealing
The ST 3000, Series 100, 100e, 600, and 900, Smart Pressure Transmitters are CSA certified as Dual
Seal devices in accordance with ANSI/ISA12.27.012003, Requirements for Process Sealing between
Electrical Systems and Flammable or Combustible Process Fluids.

Explosionproof Conduit seal


Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I, Division 1, Group A Hazardous (Classified) Location
in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, the US National Electrical Code (NEC), require a LISTED
explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit, within 18 inches of the transmitter. Crouse-Hinds type
EYS/EYD or EYSX/EYDX are examples of LISTED explosionproof seals that meets this requirement.
Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I, Division 1, Group B, C or D Hazardous (Classified)
Locations do not require an explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit.

ATTENTION

Installation should conform to all national and local electrical code requirements.

WARNING

When installed as explosionproof in a Division 1 Hazardous Location, keep covers tight while
the transmitter is energized. Disconnect power to the transmitter in the non-hazardous area
prior to removing end caps for service.

When installed as nonincendive equipment in a Division 2 Hazardous Location, disconnect power to the
transmitter in the non-hazardous area, or determine that the location is non-hazardous prior to
disconnecting or connecting the transmitter wires.

38 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


4 Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter

Output meter options


The ST 3000 transmitter can be equipped with any of these three optional output indicating meters that
provide a 0 to 100% indication of the transmitters output.

Meter type Wiring Connections to Transmitter

Integral Smart Meter with local zero and span Integral smart meter connections The new
adjustments integral smart meter (8-wires) is connected
directly to the transmitters PWA and is mounted
to the electronics module assembly inside the
electronics housing. The meter display is viewed
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
through a window in the transmitters end cap.

00 % 100 UNITS
The new integral smart meter is designed for the
ST 3000 Release 300 transmitter and provides
SPAN

-
SET
functionality not available with other smart meter
ZERO LOWER
VALUE
designs.
See Appendix A for other options of this meter
and detailed information about smart meter set up
and operation.
Meter Output indication
17-segment bargraph and LCD digital readout.

Meter provides indication of transmitters PV


output in percent of span or in actual
engineering units. The meter also can
display custom units.
Transmitter status also is displayed.

ATTENTION

Only one smart meter should be installed integrally to the transmitter.

Meter type Wiring Connections to Transmitter

Analog meter Analog meter connections You can connect


the analog meter (2-wires) integrally to Release
300 transmitters terminal block inside the
10
6 8 electronics housing. However, there are alternate
wiring methods for connecting an analog meter
4 40 % 60 80
20 remotely with the loop wiring. Section 13 in this
2

10

manual illustrates alternate wiring methods for


10
0

connecting an analog meter to Release 300


transmitters.

Meter Output indication


Traditional pointer and scale.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 39


4 Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter

The third output meter option is a meter display that can be mounted remotely in a separate housing.
Meter type Wiring Connections to Transmitter

SM 3000 Smart meter SM 3000 smart meter connections The smart


meter (3-wires) can be connected remotely to a
Release 300 transmitter. Section 13 in this
manual illustrates alternate wiring methods for
connecting this smart meter to Release 300
transmitters.
0 % 100

Meter Output indication


17-segment bargraph and digital readout to
show PV out in % of span.

ATTENTION

Be aware that the SM 3000 remote meter only shows PV output in % of span and does not
display transmitter output in custom or flow units like the new smart meter. Therefore, if you
use an SM 3000 remote meter in conjunction with a new smart meter that is configured to
display readings in custom or flow units, the indications of the two meters will be displayed in
different units.

40 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


5 Getting Started - Overview

5 Getting Started

Overview
About this section
This section tells you how to establish communications with the ST 3000 and make initial checks of the
transmitters settings and configuration using a HART hand-held communicator. This section includes
these topics:

Verifying that the HART communicator contains the proper software version for communicating the
ST 3000 transmitter.

Making proper connections of the HART communicator to the ST 3000 transmitter.

Begin communications between the transmitter and the communicator.

Make initial checks to the transmitter, such as checking factory set configuration, verify write protect
option and failsafe direction, and change if necessary.

Establishing Communications
Software compatibility
You need to make sure your HART communicator contains software that is compatible with the ST 3000
HART transmitter.
To check software revision contained in the communicator:
1. Turn on the communicator and access the Offline menu.
2. Press 4 to select the Utility menu.
3. Press 5 to select Simulation mode.
4. The Manufacturer menu appears. Select Honeywell.
5. Select Model ST3000.
6. View the software revisions available for the selected model.

The software versions that are compatible with the ST 3000 HART Release 300 Smart Transmitter are:

ST 3000 HART 5 Version: Dev v2 (Device version 2)


DD v1 (Device Description version 1)

ST 3000 HART 6 Version: Dev v4 (Device version 4)


DD 2 (Device Description version 2)
ST3000 HART 6 Advanced Diagnostics Version: Dev v5 (Device version 5)
DD v1 (Device Description version 1)

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 41


5 Getting Started - Establishing Communications

Upgrading HART communicator software


The memory module in the HART communicator is programmed with device descriptions for specific
HART-compatible devices. These device descriptions allow the communicator to recognize and talk to
the compatible devices. If you find that your communicator does not contain the necessary application
software and device descriptions, contact your Honeywell sales representative about upgrading your
communicator. See also the product manual that was supplied with your communicator for further
information.

42 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


5 Getting Started - Establishing Communications

Connecting the communicator


You connect the hand-held communicator directly to signal terminals on the transmitters terminal block or
at any convenient location in the 4 to 20 milliampere loop wiring. (Polarity of the communicator
connection does not matter.)

WARNING

When the transmitters end-cap is removed, the housing is not explosionproof.

Figure 18 shows typical communicator connections across loop wiring to a ST 3000 transmitter.

ST 3000
+
Power
Supply -

- SIGNAL +
+

-
TEST
+
Receiver
Field
250 ohm Terminals

Note: Polarity of the Communicator


connection does not matter.

Communicator

Figure 18 Typical Communicator Connections

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 43


5 Getting Started - Establishing Communications

Starting communications
Once you connect the communicator to the transmitter, you are ready to start communicating with the
transmitter. The procedure in Table 15 outlines the steps for starting communications with an ST 3000
transmitter without an assigned tag number.

Table 15 Starting Communications with Transmitter

Step Action

1 Turn on communicator. The communicator runs a self-test check then determines if it is


connected to a transmitter.

2 If you receive a communication error message (No Device Found), check the following:
Loop resistance: Is there a minimum of 250 ohms resistance between the communicator
and the power supply?
Power supply: Is power applied? Is there greater than 11 volts at the transmitter? Are you
within the operating area shown in Figure 15?
Correct any problems, then try communicating again.
If the message, or any other error message, appears again, refer to Section 11
Troubleshooting for probable cause.

3 If the transmitter is reporting any status messages, which will be displayed at this time, refer to
Section 11 Troubleshooting for more information.
When the Online displaysimilar to the one belowappears, you have established
communications with the transmitter.

ST3000: PT 3011
Online

1 Device setup
2 PV 0.00745 inH2O
3 PV AO 11.989 mA
4 PV LRV 12.5 inH2O
5 PV URV 12.5 inH2O

Note: Some values for PV, PV LRV and PV URV may not be displayed in the Online display,
(due to the limitations of the communicator display). To view these values you must use
the down arrow key to select the value and then press the right arrow key to display the
value in detail.

ATTENTION

The flashing heart icon in the upper right corner indicates the communicator and transmitter
are talking.

44 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


5 Getting Started - Making Initial Checks

Making Initial Checks


Checking configuration data
Before doing anything else, it is a good idea to review the transmitters factory-set configuration
parameters. Table 16 outlines the steps.

Table 16 Reviewing Factory-Set Configuration Parameters

Step Action

1 From the Online menu, enter Device setup by pressing the right arrow () key on the
communicator keypad.

2 Press the down arrow () key to scroll down to menu-item 5 Review. When highlighted press
the right arrow () key to enter review function. A display similar to the one shown below
appears.

ST3000:PT 3011
Review
Manufacturer
Honeywell

HELP PREV NEXT EXIT

3 Press PREV and/or NEXT to scroll through and view the configuration data, including:

Manufacturer* Descriptor
Transmitter model* Message
Transmitter Measurement type* Meter Units***
PV unit Write protection**
Maximum and minimum range limits Final assembly number
- PV LRL Device ID*
- PV URL*
Universal revision*
- PV LTL***
- PV UTL*** Field device revision*
PV Damping Software revision*
PV output in % of range Polling address
PV transfer function (Output conformity) Loop Current Mode***
PV upper range value (URV) Configuration Change Counter***
PV lower range value (LRV) Number of required preambles*
PV AO (analog output) in milliamperes Install Date****
PV AO alarm option (failsafe direction)** Power Fail Count****
SV (Secondary Variable) unit Electronics Temperature****
PROM ID* % Life in Stress****
Tag name % Service Life Used****
Long tag name*** Static Pressure*****
Date

This information is fixed and cannot be changed by reconfiguring the transmitter.


** Alarm option and transmitter security are jumper-selectable on the electronics board.
***HART 6 only.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 45


5 Getting Started - Making Initial Checks

Step Action

**** HART 6 with Universal rev 6, Field device rev 5, Software rev 36
***** Future Feature to be added for DP meter body type; static pressure is 0.0 for AP and GP
type meter bodies.

For more details , refer to Review parameters under the Advanced Diagnostics Release for
ST 3000 topic

4 After reviewing the transmitter data, press EXIT which takes you back to the Device setup
display.

Transmitter write protection option


The ST 3000 transmitters have a transmitter security option, also known as a write protect option, which
is jumper-selectable. When the write protect option is ordered, transmitters are shipped with a default
jumper position for read-only. This means that the transmitters configuration database can not be
overwritten. To allow read/write access, the jumper can be moved to the read/write position. When the
write protect option is not ordered access is read/write. If you do want to change the jumper position, refer
to the procedure in Section 8. Figure 19 below shows the location of the write protect jumper on the PWA.
Note that if the SL (SIL option) has been specified in the model number and the user intends to operate the
device in the safety mode, then the write protect jumper must be in the write protect position.

Figure 19 Write Protection and Failsafe Direction Jumper Location

Failure mode (Failsafe) alarm jumper


ST 3000 transmitters are shipped with a default failsafe direction of upscale. This means that the
transmitters output will be driven upscale (maximum output) when the transmitter detects a critical status.
You can change the direction from upscale to downscale (minimum output) by cutting jumper W1 on the
transmitters PWA. If you do want to change the jumper position, refer to the procedure in Section 8.
Figure 19 shows the location of failure mode alarm jumper on the PWA.

46 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


5 Getting Started - Making Initial Checks

Local smart meter display indications


If your ST 3000 transmitter is equipped with the smart meter option, you can check the status of all the
indicators on the local smart meter LCD display by cycling power to the transmitter. The meter runs a brief
self-test whenever power is applied to the transmitter. All the display indicators are lit during the self-test
as shown in Figure 20. (Note that the display may revert to dashes ( ) after the self-test until the
transmitter initializes all its functions.)

VAR UPPE R
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100

-18. 8 . 8 0
SP AN UNITS

%
SET
FLOW

OUTPUT MODE ANALOG In H 2 O


ZERO CHECK STATUS LOWER
GPH mmHg VALUE
KNOWN VALUE K GPM PSI A

Figure 20 Smart Meter Display with All Indicators Lit.

Please refer to Table A-2 in Appendix A for a description of the pushbuttons on the meter face. Appendix
A in this manual contains procedures for setting up the meter display, as well as descriptions of the meter
indicators, with examples of typical display indications and error codes. Use the communicator to check the
transmitters status.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 47


6 Configuration - Overview

6 Configuration

Overview
About this section
This section introduces you to ST 3000 transmitter configuration. It identifies the parameters that make up
the transmitters configuration database and provides procedures for entering values/selections for the
given configuration parameters.

This section also provides an overview of the HART communicator, including data on menus and
keyboard, descriptions of display selections and symbols, and information on making changes using the
communicator.

Section contents
This section includes these topics.

An overview of the configuration process and how messages are exchanged between transmitter and
communicator.

A summary of the ST 3000 configuration parameters and how to access this data using the
communicator.

An overview of the communicator keyboard, displays and menu structure.

Procedures for configuring the ST 3000 transmitter with the communicator.

48 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

Configuration Overview
About configuration
Each ST 3000 transmitter includes a configuration database that defines its particular operating
characteristics. You can use a communicator to change selected parameters within a given transmitters
database to alter its operating characteristics. This process of viewing and/or changing database parameters
is called configuration.
Figure 21 shows a graphic summary of the configuration process.

Configuration Database

Transmitter's
Operating
Characteristics

View and/or
change
database
parameters

HART
Communicator

ST 3000

Figure 21 Summary of Configuration Process

Transmitter configuration can be accomplished both on-line with the transmitter powered up and
connected to the communicator, or off-line where you enter the configuration in the communicator and
then store it in memory for later downloading to the transmitter

Communicator and ST 3000 transmitter memories


As shown in Figure 22, both the communicator and the ST 3000 transmitter have working memories. They
serve as temporary storage areas for data exchanged between them during communications.
The transmitter also has a nonvolatile memory that is the permanent storage area for a backup copy of all
the data held in the working memory. Nonvolatile memory retains its data even if the transmitter loses
power.
The communicator has a second temporary storage area called the off-line memory (memory module or
data pack). It serves as a permanent storage area for a saved configuration database. The memory module
or data pack supports the communicators SEND function to restore a saved configuration database to a
transmitter. Figure 22 shows the working relationship between communicator and transmitter memories
during communications.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 49


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

Working Working
Memory Memory

Memory Module
Nonvolatile or
Memory Data Pack
(Nonvolatile)

HART
Communicator

ST 3000

Figure 22 Communicator and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories

Copying transmitter configuration into nonvolatile memory


When setting up or configuring a ST 3000, whether you are changing one value or a configuration
database, all configuration data must be copied into the transmitters non-volatile memory to ensure the
security of the data.
Normally, thirty seconds after a value is changed, the transmitter automatically copies it from the
transmitters working memory into nonvolatile memory. But, if you change a value and power is
interrupted to the transmitter before the change is copied to nonvolatile memory, you will lose the data in
the working memory and it will not be saved in nonvolatile memory.
Therefore, when data is sent (downloaded) to the transmitter, be sure power to the transmitter is not
interrupted before it can be copied to nonvolatile memory.

50 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

What to configure
Table 17 summarizes the parameters that are included in the configuration database for a ST 3000 pressure
transmitter.

Table 17 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters

Configuration Data Setting or Selection

Tag Key in a tag identification up to eight characters in length.


(Transmitter Tag Number)

PV unit Select any one of the pre-programmed engineering units.


(Unit of Measurement)

ST 3000 transmitters with inches of water ranges are factory


calibrated using pressure referenced to a temperature of 39.2F
(4C).
Pressure readings can be displayed in any one of these pre-
programmed engineering units:
inH2O bar torr
inHg mbar atm
ftH2O g/Sq cm MPa
mmH2O kg/Sq cm inH2O @ 4degC
mmHg Pa mmH2O @ 4degC
psi kPa inH2O @ 60degF

Range Values

PV LRV Key in desired value through communicator keyboard or set LRV to


(Lower Range Value) applied pressure.

Process input for


4 mA (0%) output

PV URV Key in desired value through communicator keyboard or set URV to


(Upper Range Value) applied pressure.

Process input for


20 mA (100%) output

Local meter Setup parameters for integral smart meter display.


Installed (Read only detects if meter is installed in transmitter)
Units (Engineering units for meter display)
Upper (Upper display limit, if applicable)
Lower (Lower display limit, if applicable)

Table continued on next page

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 51


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

Configuration Data Setting or Selection

Device Information Select or key in the following device-specific information for:


Manufacturer * Message
Model * Write protect **
Measurement Type * Final assembly number
PROM ID * Device ID *
Tag Loop current mode***
Long tag*** Revision numbers *
Config. Change counter*** Universal revision *
Date Field device revision *
Descriptor Software revision *
* This information is fixed and is read-only.
** Write protect is jumperselectable on the transmitter PWA. See
Section 8.
***HART 6 only.

PV transfer function Select either: Linear


(Output Conformity) Square Root

PV Damping Select one of these values (in seconds):


(Damping Time Constant)
0.00 0.32 1.00 4.00 16.0
0.16 0.48 2.00 8.00 32.0

SV unit Select one of the temperature units for display of the secondary
(Secondary Variable) variable or meter body temperature.
Deg C deg F deg R K

Poll Address Select the device address for the transmitter.

HART 5: Select address 0 for a transmitter operating in analog


mode, as well as support for HART communications. (Factory set
address)
Select address 1 to 15 for a transmitter operating in multidrop mode.
HART 6: Select address 0 to 63.

Interface menus
Information available through the communicator is accessed through menus. The procedures in this manual
give the shortest path from the Online (or HOME) menu. There are alternate paths which, depending on
your starting point, may be better suited.

52 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

HART 5 Online menu


The online menu is displayed when the 275 or 375 communicator is connected to a powered transmitter or
the loop wiring and is switched on. Figure 23 summarizes the menus available from the Online menu.
See page numbers for information.

To HART Communicator menu ONLINE


Device setup
PV (p. 90) HOME menu
PV AO (p. 90)
PV LRV (p. 58)
PV URV (p. 58)

Process variables Critical (p. 91)


Pressure Non-Critical (p. 91)
Pressure % range (p. 90)
AO Zero Trim (p. 71, 81)
SV (p. 91) Apply Values (p. 59, 73, 75, 77, 78, 81, 85, 86)
Enter Values
Diagnostics/Service Correct Input LRV (p. 111)
Correct Input URV (p. 112)
Master reset Reset corrects (p. 113)
Device Status (p. 91)
Loop test (p. 68)
Calibration PV LRV Installed
D/A trim (p. 110) PV URV Units
PV LRL Upper
PV URL Lower
Basic Setup
Tag (p. 48
Manufacturer Date Device ID
PV Unit (p. 48) Model Descriptor Revision numbers
Range values (p. 48) Measurement type Message (p. 49, 60) Universal rev
Local Meter (p. 140) PROM ID Write protect Field device rev
Device Info (p. 60) Tag (p. 48) Final assembly number Software rev
PV Transfer function (p. 61)
PV Damping (p. 63)
SV Units (p. 64) PV LRL
PV Unit (p. 48) URL
Sensor Info
SV (p. 91)
Detailed Setup SV unit AO Out
Sensors AO Alarm type
Signal condition Loop test
PV Damping (p. 63) D/A Trim
Output condition PV URV (p. 58) Scaled D/A trim
Device info PV LRV (p. 58)
PV Transfer function (p. 61)
PV %Range (p. 90) Poll address
Num required
preambles

Analog output
HART output

Review (p. 42)


Manufacturer PV Damping PV AO Descriptor Universal rev
Model PV % Range PV AO Alarm type Message Field Device rev
Measurement type PV transfer function SV Unit Units Software rev
PV Unit PV URV PROM ID Write protect Poll address
PV URL PV LRV Tag Final assembly number Number of
PV LRL Date Device ID required
preambles

Figure 23 HART 5 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 53


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

HART 6 Online menu


The online menu is displayed when the communicator is connected to a powered transmitter or the loop
wiring and is switched on. Figure 24 summarizes the menus available from the Online menu. See page
numbers for information.

To HART Communicator ONLINE HOME menu


Device setup
PV
Critical PV AO
Process variables Non-Critical PV LRV
PV Info (Op Volts < 10)* PV URV
Pressure % range Ext dev status
PV AO
SV Install Date
Electronics Temperature* Zero Trim
Time in Service
Static Pressure** Zero Trim Records*
% Service Life in Stress
Apply Values
Enter Values Power Up Diagnosticss*
Correct Input LRV ET Tracking Diagnostics*
Diagnostics/Service
Master reset Correct LRV Records* Operating Voltage*
Device Status Correct Input URV PV Tracking Diagnostics*
Loop test Correct URV Records* MBT Tracking Diagnostics*
Calibration Reset corrects
% Service Life Used
D/A trim
SP Tracking Diagnostics. *
Advanced Diagnostics*

PV LRV LTL
PV URV UTL Installed
LRL Units
Basic Setup URL Meter Upper Limit
Tag Meter Lower Limit
Long tag
PV Unit
Range values Manufacturer Config Change Counter Device ID Install Date*
Local Meter Model Date Loop Current Mode Model Number*
Device Info Meas type Descriptor Revision numbers Material*
PV Transfer function PROM ID Message Universal rev
PV Damping Tag Write protect Field device rev
Long tag Final assembly number Software rev
SV Units

PV
PV Unit
Detailed Setup Sensor Info LRL LTL
Sensors SV URL UTL
SV unit
Signal condition
Output condition
Device info PV AO
PV Damping PV AO Alarm type
PV URV Loop Current Mode
PV LRV Loop test
PV Transfer function D/A Trim
Pressure % Range Scaled D/A trim

Analog output Poll address


HART output Num required preambles

Review
Manufacturer PV % Range Long tag Universal rev Install Date*
Model PV Xfer function Date Field Device rev Power Fail Count*
Measurement type PV URV Descriptor Software rev Electronics Temperature*
PV Units PV LRV Message Poll address % Service Life in Stress*
PV LRL PV AO Meter Units Loop Current Mode % Service Life Used*
PV URL PV Alarm type Write protect Configuration Change Counter Static Pressure **
PV LTL SV Units Final assembly number Number of required preambles Tag
PV UTL PV DampingFigure 23a HART 6 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary
PROM ID Device ID

Figure 24 HART 6 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary

54 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

Note: * next to the parameter indicates that this parameter is available only in the ST 3000 HART 6 with
the following Version information:
** Future Feature to be added for DP meter body type; static pressure is 0.0 for AP and GP type meter
bodies.

Universal rev: 6
Field device rev: 5
Software rev: 36

HART 5 275 or 375 Communicator menu


Figure 25 summarizes the menus available from the HART Communicator menu. The HART
Communicator menu is accessed by backing out (pressing the left arrow on the keypad) from the Online
menu.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 55


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

HART Communicator
Offline
Online Takes you to HOME menu
Frequency device See Figure 23.
Utility

Offline
New configuration Manufacturer
Saved Configuration Model
Module, Data pack Field device rev.
or PC contents From blank template
Mark all
Unmark all
Edit individually
Edit
Copy to . . . PV unit
Send Specifies storage location (memory)
where you want the configuration to PV Damping
Print PV URV
Delete be stored. The configuration name
can be changed, if desired. PV LRV
Rename Transfer function
Compare Temperature unit
Send (download) a saved Tag
configuration to connected device. Message
Save as . . .
Selects and compares a device
Frequency device configuration with another device
Frequency configuration.
Pressure

Utility Communicator setup and operation settings.


Configure Communicator Please refer to the communicator product manual or use the online help
System Information for details on these menu options.
Listen for PC Polling
Storage Location Contrast
Simulation Off Time
Ignore diagnostics
Delete Configuration

Figure 25 HART 5 275 or 375 Communicator Menu Summary

56 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

HART 6 375 Communicator menu


Figure 26 summarizes the menus available from the HART Communicator menu. The HART
Communicator menu is accessed by backing out (pressing the left arrow on the keypad) from the Online
menu.

HART Communicator
Offline
Online Takes you to HOME menu
Utility See Figure 24.
HART Diagnostics

Offline
New configuration Manufacturer
Saved Configuration Internal Flash Contents Model
Configuration EM Contents
Field device rev.
Mark all
Unmark all
Edit individually
Specifies storage location (memory)
Edit
where you want the configuration to
Copy to . . . PV unit
be stored. The configuration name
Send PV Damping
can be changed, if desired.
Print PV URV
Delete PV LRV
Rename Send (download) a saved Transfer function
Compare configuration to connected device. SV unit
Tag
Selects and compares a device Long tag
configuration with another device Date
configuration. Descriptor
Message
Final Assy Number
Utility Communicator setup and operation
Configure HART Application settings. Save as . . .
Available Device Descriptions Please refer to the communicator
Simulation product manual or use the online
help for details on these menu
options.

Polling
HAR T Diagnostics Ignore Status
DC Voltage Measurement HART 6 Tag
Storage cleanup

Figure 26 HART 6 375 Communicator Menu Summary

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 57


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

Model 275 Communicator


Figure 27 shows the elements of the Model 275 HART Communicator.

Display

Function keys

Action keys

Alphanumeric keys

Shift keys

Figure 27 Model 275 HART Communicator

58 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

Model 275 Interface characteristics


Keep in mind the following display-selection descriptions when configuring a transmitter. These selections
are highlighted at the bottom of the display screen, directly above the four function keys at the top of the
communicators keypad (F1, F2, F3, and F4). To make desired highlighted selection, press the
corresponding function key.

Function Key Description or Action


HOME Takes you back to the Online display.
EXIT Backs you out of the current display.
END Backs you out of one level to the next higher level.
ABORT Cancels a procedure backing you out of current display, and allows you to
make another choice.
ESC Cancels a procedure backing you out of current display, and allows you to
make another choice.
SEND Downloads the contents of the communicators working memory to the
transmitters memory. Changes made in the communicators working
memory are not transferred to the transmitter until a SEND command is
issued.
If you have not sent the changes and are about to turn off the
communicator, you will receive a prompt warning you that there is unsent
data and asking if you want to send it before shutting off.
NEXT and PREV Allows you to scroll through a list of configured parameters.
ENTER Allows you to choose the highlighted selection or to continue after
performing an action, such as removing the loop from automatic control.
HELP Gives a brief definition/explanation of the current selection or display.
DEL Deletes character directly beneath flashing cursor.

Symbols

Symbol Description or Action


Flashing heart icon in the upper right corner of display screen indicates that
the transmitter and communicator are talking.
When this symbol appears on the display screen it indicates that you can
press the left arrow on the keypad to back out to another display.

and/or These arrows appear on the display screen to indicate there is more
information to scroll through, using the indicated arrow on the keypad.

This arrow appears on the display screen to indicate that a menu item
contains more information that can be accessed by pressing the right arrow
on the keypad.

[>>>] This hot key on the keypad allows you to access range values (LRV,
URV, LRL, and URL) directly. When finished, you return to the spot from
which you started.

ATTENTION

An alternate way of selecting a menu item, besides using the up and down arrows, is to press
the key corresponding to the number left of the desired menu item.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 59


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

Model 375 Communicator


Figure 28 shows the elements of the Model 375 HART Communicator.

Figure 28 Model 375 HART Communicator

60 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

Model 375 Interface characteristics


The following functions appear onscreen. Tap the display to make a selection.

Touch screen function Description or Action


Flashing heart icon in the center of display screen indicates that the
transmitter and communicator are talking.
HOME Takes you back to the Online display.
EXIT Backs you out of the current display.
X Closes the current display and returns to main menu.
Backs you out of the current display. You can also press on the keypad.

>>> HART 5 only. This hot key on the keypad allows you to access range
values (LRV, URV, LRL, and URL) directly. When finished, you return to
the spot from which you started.
END Backs you out of one level to the next higher level.
ABORT Cancels a procedure backing you out of current display, and allows you to
make another choice.
ESC Cancels a procedure backing you out of current display, and allows you to
make another choice.
SEND Downloads the contents of the communicators working memory to the
transmitters memory. Changes made in the communicators working
memory are not transferred to the transmitter until a SEND command is
issued.
If you have not sent the changes and are about to turn off the
communicator, you will receive a prompt warning you that there is unsent
data and asking if you want to send it before shutting off.
NEXT and PREV Allows you to scroll through a list of configured parameters.
ENTER Allows you to choose the highlighted selection or to continue after
performing an action, such as removing the loop from automatic control.
HELP Gives a brief definition/explanation of the current selection or display.
DEL Deletes highlighted text or character to the right of the flashing cursor.
SAVE Allows you to save the current device configuration to Internal Flash or to
Configuration Expansion Module.

ATTENTION

An alternate way of selecting a menu item, besides using the up and down arrows, is to press
the key corresponding to the number left of the desired menu item.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 61


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

Making changes with 275 Communicator


When a selection in a list is highlighted (see PV Damping display below):
Using arrow keys, scroll through choices until desired selection is highlighted, then press ENTER ([F4]
function key).

ATTENTION

An alternate way of selecting a menu choice is to press the key corresponding to the number
left of the desired menu item. (For example: Pressing 3 would select 0.32 seconds in the PV
Damping display below.)

ST3000:HELLO
PV Damping
ST3000:HELLO
Select new damping.
PV Damping
ST3000:HELLO 0.00 s
Select new
PV Damping 1 damping.
0 s (damping off) 0.00 s
Select new
5 damping.
2
1.00 s 0.16 s 0.00 s
7 4.00
6 3
s 2.00 s 0.32 s
8 8.00
7 4
s 4.00 s 0.48 s
9 16.0
8 s 8.00 s
ESC ENTER
32.0 s
ESC ENTER
ESC ENTER
22900

When current selection is displayed with the same information repeated and highlighted directly beneath it
(see URV display below):
Using keypad, key in a new value, then press ENTER ([F4] function key).

ST3000: PT 3011
Pres URV

12.5 inH2O
12.5

HELP DEL ESC ENTER

When keying in alphanumeric characters:


To key in an alpha character or any symbol that appears at the top of a key, first press the arrow key (at
bottom of keypad) indicating the position of that character on the key, then press key. See the example
below to key in the word DATE.

D E F

8
+ =D
A B C

7
+ =A
S T U

1
+ =T
D E F

8
+ =E
To key in a numeric character, merely press the key.

62 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - Configuration Overview

Making changes with Model 375 Communicator


When a selection in a list is highlighted (see PV Damping display below):
Using arrow keys, scroll through choices until desired selection is highlighted, then tap ENTER key or
press ENTER key.

ATTENTION

An alternate way of selecting a menu choice is to press the key corresponding to the number
left of the desired menu item. (For example: Pressing 3 would select 0.32 seconds in the PV
Damping display below.)

ST3000:HELLO
PV Damping
ST3000:HELLO
Select new damping.
PV Damping
ST3000:HELLO 0.00 s
Select new
PV Damping 1 damping.
0 s (damping off) 0.00 s
Select new
5 damping.
2
1.00 s 0.16 s 0.00 s
7 4.00
6 3
s 2.00 s 0.32 s
8 8.00
7 4
s 4.00 s 0.48 s
9 16.0
8 s 8.00 s
ESC ENTER
32.0 s
ESC ENTER
ESC ENTER
22900

When current selection is displayed with the same information repeated and highlighted directly beneath it
(see URV display below):
Using touch screen keys or keypad to key in a new value, then ENTER.

ST3000: PT 3011
Pres URV

12.5 inH2O
12.5

HELP DEL ESC ENTER

When keying in alphanumeric characters:


To key in an alphanumeric character or any symbol that appears at the top of a key, do either of the
following.

press an alphanumeric key to cycle through its characters. For example, for the letter V, press
the TUV8 key three times. Or,

use the touch screen to enter a new value.


To key in a numeric character, merely press the key.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 63


6 Configuration - Tag Entering a Tag Number

Tag Entering a Tag Number


ATTENTION

If you want to record the configuration data for your transmitter, there is a Configuration
Record Sheet provided in Appendix B.

The procedure in Table 18 shows how to enter a sample tag number of PT 3011 into the transmitters
configuration database.

Table 18 Entering Tag Number

Step Action

1 From the Online menu, select Device setup.

2 At Device setup menu, select Basic setup.

3 Select Tag.

4 When Tag display appears, key in tag name (for example: PT 3011) which can be a
maximum of eight characters.
Refer to Making changes in the previous section for information on keying in alphanumeric
characters.

5 Press ENTER.

6 Either:
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or

go to another procedure and continue making changes.

64 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - PV unit Selecting Unit of Pressure Measurement

PV unit Selecting Unit of Pressure Measurement


You can choose to have the pressure measurements displayed in one of the pre-programmed engineering
units in the communicator.
The procedure in Table 19 shows how to select the desired pre-programmed engineering units.

Table 19 Selecting Engineering Units

Step Action

1 From Online menu, select Device setup.

2 Select Basic setup.

3 Select PV Unit.

4 At Pressure unit display, scroll through available units listed below.


InH2O psi Pa inH2O @4degC
InHg bar kPa mmH2O @4degC
ftH2O mbar torr inH2O @60degF
mmH2O g/Sqcm atm
mmHg kg/Sqcm MPa

5 When the desired unit is highlighted, press ENTER.


Pressing ESC will cancel procedure without changing unit selection.

6 Either:
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or

go to another procedure and continue making changes.

ATTENTION

Since the engineering units affect the value of LRV and URV, it is recommended that you send
the changed PV unit to the transmitter and then verify and change as required the values of
LRV and URV.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 65


6 Configuration - Range Values Setting PV URV and PV LRV

Range Values Setting PV URV and PV LRV


You can set the LRV and URV by either keying in the desired values through the communicator keypad or
applying the corresponding LRV and URV pressures directly to the transmitter.

Procedure for keying in LRV and URV


Table 20 gives the procedure for keying in the range values for a sample 5 to 45 inH2O range. (If inH2O is
not the unit being used, follow the procedure in Table 19 to change it.)

ATTENTION

ST 3000 Smart Transmitters are factory calibrated with inches of water ranges using inches
of water pressure referenced to a temperature of 39.2F (4C).
For a reverse range, enter the upper range value as the LRV and the lower range value as
the URV. For example, to make a 0 to 50 psi range a reverse range, enter 50 as the LRV
and 0 as the URV.
When setting the range using applied pressures (procedure in Table 21), the URV changes
automatically to compensate for any changes in the LRV and to maintain the present span
(URV LRV). When entering the LRV with the keypad (in Table 20), the URV does not
change automatically.
If you are using the applied pressure method and must change both the LRV and URV,
always change the LRV first.

Table 20 Keying in LRV and URV

Step Action

1 Starting at the Online menu, make the following menu selections:


Device setup

Basic setup

Range values

PV LRV

2 Key in the desired LRV setting (for example: 5).


Press ENTER. This takes you back to Range values menu.

3 Choose PV URV.

4 Key in the desired URV setting (for example: 45).


Press ENTER.

5 Either:
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or

go to another procedure and continue making changes.

66 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - Range Values Setting PV URV and PV LRV

Procedure for setting range values to applied pressure


Table 21 gives the procedure for setting range values to sample applied pressures.

ATTENTION

When setting the range using applied pressures (procedure in Table 21), the URV changes
automatically to compensate for any changes in the LRV and to maintain the present span
(URV LRV). When entering the LRV with the keypad (in Table 20), the URV does not
change automatically.
If you are using the applied pressure method and must change both the LRV and URV,
always change the LRV first.

Table 21 Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures

Step Action

1 Starting at the Online menu, make the following menu selections:


Device setup

Diag/Service

Calibration

Apply values

You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.

2 When the following display appears

ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:

1 4mA
2 20mA
3 Exit

ABORT ENTER

choose 4mA, then press ENTER.


A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input.

3 Apply known input pressure to transmitter that represents LRV for 4 mA (0%) output. Press
OK.

4 When the Current applied process value: display appears, choose Set as 4mA value then
press ENTER. This returns you to display shown in Step 2.

5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to set the URV to the applied input pressure for 20 mA output.

6 Select Exit and press ENTER.


You will be prompted to return the loop to automatic control. After doing so, press OK.

ATTENTION

You can also use the local zero and span adjustments on the new smart meter to set the lower
and upper range values to applied pressures. See Appendix A for the procedure.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 67


6 Configuration - Device Information

Device Information
Device information menu contains important data for device identification, such as transmitter type, device
tag, serial numbers and revision numbers of the transmitter. Some data is fixed and is read only for
identification purposes. Table 22 outlines the steps for accessing data under the device information menu.

Table 22 Viewing/Entering Device Information Data

Step Action

1 From Online menu, select Device setup.

2 Select Basic setup.

3 Select Device Information.

4 At Device Information display, scroll through available parameter selections listed below.
Parameter Value
Manufacturer * Honeywell
Model * ST3000
Measurement type * Pressure sensor type (DP, GP, AP)
PROM ID * 10-digit PROM ID number
Tag PT3011 (or enter an 8 character tag name if one is not
shown)
Long Tag 32 character tag name
Configuration Change Counter*** Number of configuration changes made
Date Enter date
Descriptor Up to 8 character description
Message Key in a message (up to 32 characters), if desired.
Write protect ** No (or Yes)
Final assembly number Up to an 8 digit number
Device ID * First 7 characters of PROM ID
Loop Current Mode*** Enable for Analog mode, disable for multi-drop

HART 6 HART 5/SIL HART5
Revision numbers * Universal rev 6 5 5
Field device rev 4 2 2
Software rev 35 34 33 and below


HART 6
Revision numbers**** Universal rev 6
(Advanced Diag Release) Field device rev 5
Software rev 36
Install Date **** 01/01/2009
Model Number(Method)**** Displays the model number of the device.
Example:
Model Number Is: Key number STD120-
Table I is B2A-
Table II is 00000 -
TABLE III is FF, SL, WX,
SH,A2,LT,SS,S4,SB,UM,TP,F3,F6,W4,1C

68 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - Device Information

Step Action

Materials Constr **** This is a Method which may be used to translate the
key number, Table I and Table II values of the model
number to determine device type/range, materials of
construction and flange information.
-Show Key Number
-General
-Special
-Show flange Assembly Number

This data is fixed and cannot be changed by reconfiguring the transmitter.


** Write protection is selected by changing a jumper on the transmitter PWA. See
Section 8.
*** HART 6 only.

****HART 6 Advanced Diagnostics For ST 3000 Release only with the Universal Rev 6,
Field Device Rev 5 and Software Rev 36. For details about these parameters refer to
Detailed Setup Device Info under the Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release topic.
When the desired parameter is highlighted, press right arrow key.
Note: If the parameter value is highlighted with a blinking cursor, the value can be changed.
Enter a new value, if desired and press ENTER.
Note: Pressing ESC will cancel action without changing selection.

5 Either:
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or

go to another procedure and continue making changes.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 69


6 Configuration - Device Information

Pressure transfer function Selecting Output Conformity

Output form options


You can select the transmitters output to represent either a straight linear calculation, or a square root
calculation for flow measurement applications using a differential pressure type transmitter. Thus, we refer
to the linear or the square root selection as the output conformity or the output form.
The procedure in Table 23 shows how to select the desired Output conformity.

Table 23 Selecting Output Conformity

Step Action

1 From Online menu, select Device setup.

2 Select Basic setup.

3 Select PV xfer fnctn.

4 Select either Linear or Square root, then press ENTER.

5 Either:
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or

go to another procedure and continue making changes.

About square root output


For differential pressure transmitters measuring the pressure drop across a primary element, the flow rate is
directly proportional to the square root of the differential or pressure drop. The ST 3000 transmitters
output is automatically converted to equal percent of flow when its output conformity is configured as
square root.
You can use these formulas to manually calculate the percent of flow for comparison purposes.
(Note: This formula assumes that LRV = 0.)
P
Span 100 = %P

Where, P = Differential pressure input in engineering units


Span = Transmitters measurement span (URV LRV)
%P = Pressure input in percent of span

%P
Therefore, 100 100 = % Flow
And, you can use this formula to determine the corresponding current output in milliamperes direct current.
(% Flow 16 mA) + 4 mA = mA dc Output

70 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - Device Information

EXAMPLE: If you have a differential pressure transmitter with a range of 0 to 100 inches of water
with an input of 49 inches of water, substituting into the previous formulas yields:
49
100 100 = 49%

49%
100 100 = 70% Flow, and
70% 16 + 4 = 15.2 mA dc Output

Square root dropout


To avoid unstable output at readings near zero, the ST 3000 transmitter automatically drops square root
conformity and changes to linear conformity for low differential pressure readings. As shown in Figure 29,
the point is near 0.5% of input for ST 3000 transmitters.

0utput Flow
(mA dc) (% of Span)
6.4 15

14

13

12

11 Dropout Points

5.6 10
u rve
o tC
9 Ro
re
ua
8 Sq
7

4.8 5

4 0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4

Differential Pressure (% Full Scale)

Figure 29 Square Root Dropout Point

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 71


6 Configuration - PV damping Adjusting Damping Time

PV damping Adjusting Damping Time


You can adjust the damping time to reduce the output noise. We suggest that you set the damping to the
smallest value that the system can accept.

ATTENTION

The electrical noise effect on the output signal is partially related to the turndown ratio of the
transmitter. As the turndown ratio increases, the peak-to-peak noise on the output signal
increases. You can use this formula to find the turndown ratio using the range information for
your transmitter.

Upper Range Limit


Turndown Ratio = (Upper Range Value Lower Range Value)

EXAMPLE: The turndown ratio for a 400 inH2O transmitter with a range of 0 to 50 inH2O would be:
400 8
Turndown Ratio = (50 0) = 1 or 8:1

The procedure in Table 24 outlines how to adjust the damping time.

Table 24 Adjusting Damping Time

Step Action

1 From Online menu, select Device setup.

2 Select Basic setup.

3 Select PV Damp.

4 At PV Damping display, scroll through selections until desired value is highlighted. Press
ENTER.
The damping values are set at:
0.00 s, 0.16 s, 0.32 s, 0.48 s, 1.00 s,
2.00 s, 4.00 s, 8.00 s, 16.0 s, 32.0 seconds.
If you do not want to change the damping value, press ABORT.

5 Either:
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or

go to another procedure and continue making changes.

72 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - SV units Selecting Secondary Variable units

SV units Selecting Secondary Variable units


You can select the temperature units for display of the secondary variable, which is the meter body
temperature.

Table 25 Selecting SV Temperature Units

Step Action

1 From Online menu, select Device setup.

2 Select Basic setup.

3 Select SV Unit.

4 Scroll down to highlight the desired temperature units:


degC degF degR Kelvin

5 When the desired selection is highlighted, press ENTER.


Pressing ESC will cancel procedure without changing unit selection.

6 Either:
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or

go to another procedure and continue making changes.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 73


6 Configuration - Poll addr Selecting Poll Address

Poll addr Selecting Poll Address


You can select the poll address for the transmitter that determines certain communications characteristics.

HART communications protocol provides for communications to multiple HART devices connected on
the same loop (multidrop mode). In a multidrop mode, each device in the loop must be given a unique
address.

For HART 5, a device with a poll address of 1 through 15 is identified as being in multidrop mode.
Communication between the communicator and the devices takes place digitally, with the analog output
remaining constant (fixed at 4 mA average).
A device with a poll address of 0 (zero) will provide a 4 to 20 mA analog output as well as receive
requests and respond to commands from the HART communicator.

For HART 6, analog output mode is a separate menu item (Loop Current Mode). Poll Addresses may be
set from 0 to 63.
The steps in Table 26 show how set the poll address of the transmitter. ST 3000 transmitters are shipped
from the factory with poll address 0.

Table 26 Selecting Poll Address

Step Action

1 From Online menu, select Device setup.

2 Select Detailed setup.

3 Select Output condition.

4 Select HART output.

5 Press the right arrow key to change Poll addr for transmitter.

For HART 5:
Key in address 0 for a transmitter operating in analog mode.

Key in address from 1 to 15 for a transmitter operating an a multidrop mode.

For HART 6:
Key in address from 0 to 63.

6 HART 6 models only:


Scroll to Loop Curnt Mode. Select whether to Enable or Disable analog mode.

7 Press ENTER.
Pressing ESC will cancel procedure without changing unit selection.

8 Either:
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or

go to another procedure and continue making changes.

74 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


6 Configuration - Install Date Enter Install Date

Install Date Enter Install Date


This option exists only for HART 6 Advanced Diagnostics For ST 3000 Release with the Universal Rev
6, Field Device Rev 5 and Software Rev 36.
For more details, refer to Basic Setup Device Information under the Advanced Diagnostics for ST
3000 Release topic.

The Install Date represents the date of installation of the device at the users site. The user enters a date
once during device lifetime. Once the date has been entered, no further updates are possible. The value is
permanently saved and becomes accessible as a read-only parameter for reference.
The steps in Table 27 show how to enter the Installation Date. ST 3000 transmitters are shipped from
the factory with Install Date initialized to 01/01/1999.

Table 27 Entering Installation Date

Step Action

1 From Online menu, select Device setup.

2 Select Basic setup.

3 Select Device Information.

4 Select Install Date.

5 Enter the actual date of installation in the following format:


MM/DD/YYYY: where MM is month, DD is day, YYYY is the year.

7 Press ENTER.
Pressing ESC will cancel procedure without changing unit selection.

8 Either:
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or

go to another procedure and continue making changes.

Disconnecting the Communicator


Disconnection checklist
Do the following steps before disconnecting the communicator:

Make sure the transmitter is not in the current output mode.

Download all configuration database changes to the transmitters memory by selecting SEND.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 75


7 Start-up - Overview

7 Start-up

Overview
About this section
This section identifies typical start-up tasks associated with several generic pressure measurement
applications. It also includes the procedure for running an optional analog output check.
This section includes these topics.
Performing an analog output check
Start up procedures for the different types of pressure transmitters in various applications, such as
DP transmitter in a flow measurement
DP transmitter in a pressure measurement
DP transmitter in a liquid level measurement applications
GP transmitter in pressure or liquid level measurement applications
AP transmitter in a pressure measurement
DP transmitter with remote diaphragm seals in a liquid level measurement application

ATTENTION

All procedures in this manual assume a transmitter poll address of 0 (zero). See Section 6, for
information about poll address.

76 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


7 Start-up - Start-up Tasks

Start-up Tasks
About start-up
Once you have installed and configured a transmitter, you are ready to start up the process loop. Start-up
usually includes

Applying process pressure to the transmitter,

Checking zero input, and

Reading input and output.


You can also run an optional output check to wring out an analog loop prior to start-up.

Procedure reference
The actual steps in a start-up procedure will vary based on the type of transmitter and the measurement
application. In general, you use the communicator to check the transmitters input and output under static
process conditions, and make adjustments as required, before putting the transmitter into full operation with
the running process.
Choose the applicable procedure to reference in this section from Table 28 based on your type of
transmitter and the measurement application. The reference procedure will give you some idea of the
typical tasks associated with starting up a transmitter in a given application.

Table 28 Start-up Procedure Reference

IF transmitter type is ... AND application is ... THEN reference procedure


in ...
Differential Pressure (DP) Flow Measurement Table 30
Pressure Measurement Table 31
Liquid Level Measurement for Table 32
Vented Tank with Dry Reference
Leg*
Liquid Level Measurement for Table 33
Pressurized Tank with Liquid-Filled
Reference Leg*
Gauge Pressure (GP) Pressure or Liquid Level Table 34
Measurement**
Absolute Pressure (AP) Pressure Measurement** Table 35
DP with Remote Seals Liquid Level Measurement Table 36

* These applications also apply for flange-mounted liquid level type transmitters that are usually
mounted directly to a flange at the zero level of the tank.

** These applications also apply for GP and AP type transmitters equipped with remote seals.
However, you can only confirm that input pressure correlates with transmitter output in processes using
remote seal connections.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 77


7 Start-up - Running Analog Output

Running Analog Output


Background
You can put the transmitter into a constant-current source mode to check out other instruments in the loop
such as recorders, controllers, and positioners. Using the communicator, you can tell the transmitter to
change its output to any value between 4 mA (1V or 0%) and 20 mA (5V or 100%) and maintain that
output. This makes it easy to verify loop operation through the accurate simulation of transmitter output
signals before bringing the loop on line. Note that the constant-current source mode is also referred to as
the output mode.

ATTENTION

The transmitter does not measure the input or update the output while it is in the constant-
current source mode.

Procedure
The procedure in Table 29 outlines the steps for using a transmitter in the constant current source mode.

Table 29 Using Transmitter in Constant-Current Source (Output) Mode

Step Action

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on. If possible, locate communicator
where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If you want to verify loop
calibration, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.

2 From the Online menu, step through the following menu selections by highlighting and
pressing the right arrow key:
Device setup

Diag/Service

Loop test

You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK.

3 At the Choose analog output level display, select 4mA to set the output signal level to 4 mA
(1.0V or 0%).
Press ENTER. The communicator notifies you that the transmitters output is fixed at 4 mA.

4 Check that receiving device indication is at its 0% point. If applicable, check that milliammeter
reading is 4 mA or voltmeter reading is 1.0V.
If indication is inaccurate, check the calibration of receiving device.
Use the transmitter output as a calibration input source for instruments in the loop.
If you want to choose a 20 mA output value, then press OK and go to Step 5.

If you want to choose another output value, then press OK and go to Step 7.

If you have completed the loop test, then press OK and go to Step 8.

5 Select 20mA to set output signal to 20 mA (5.0V or 100%).


Press ENTER. The communicator notifies you that the transmitter s output is fixed at 20 mA.

78 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


7 Start-up - Running Analog Output

Step Action

6 Check that receiving device indication is at its 100% point. If applicable, check that
milliammeter reading is 20 mA or voltmeter reading is 5.0V.
If you want to choose another output value, then press OK and go to Step 7.

If you have completed the loop test, then press OK and go to Step 8.

7 Select Other and press ENTER, then use communicators keyboard to enter other values.
For example, Transmitter output PV in % Communicator keystrokes
If you want an output of: 8.0 mA 2.0V 25% press 8 and ENTER.
8.8 mA 2.2V 30% press 8.8 and ENTER.
12.0 mA 3.0V 50% press 12 and ENTER.
16.0 mA 4.0V 75% press 16 and ENTER.
The communicator notifies you that the transmitters output is fixed at that value.
When you have completed the loop test, press OK and go to Step 8.

8 Select End and press ENTER. The communicator will notify you that it is returning the
transmitter to its original output.
A screen will prompt you to return the loop to automatic control. After doing so, press OK.

Voltmeter

Precision Field
Milliammeter Terminals
+
Red + 250 Power
Supply
-
+
-
LP

Black - -
HP Receiver
+

HART hand-held
Commnicator
Differential
Pressure Note: Polarity of the Communicator
Transmitter connection does not matter.

Figure 30 Typical Communicator and Meter Connections for Constant-Current Source


(Output) Mode

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 79


7 Start-up - Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter

Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter


Procedure
The procedure in Table 30 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter in a
liquid flow measurement application. Refer to Figure 31 for the piping arrangement identification and
Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter connections.

LP Blockoff

LP

HP
Plug G

Plug F
HP Blockoff

Valve B

Valve A

Valve C
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter

Figure 31 Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter

ATTENTION

For the procedure in Table 30, we are assuming that all the valves on the three-valve manifold
and the block-off valves were closed at installation.

Table 30 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement

Step Action

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If


possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 27 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.

80 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


7 Start-up - Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter

Step Action

2 Open equalizer valve C.


Refer to Figure 28 for sample piping arrangement.

3 Open valves A and HP block-off to make differential pressure zero (0) by applying same
pressure to both sides of meter body.
Allow system to stabilize at full static pressurezero differential.

4 At the Online menu, read the applied input pressure (PV).


Also check that the PV analog output displays a corresponding zero input pressure.

5 Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.


If communicator and milliammeter readings are
exactly 4 mA, then go to Step 9.

not exactly 4 mA, then go to Step 6.

6 From Online menu, step through the following menu selections:


Device setup

Diag/Service

Calibration

Zero trim

7 Under Zero trim do the following when prompted:


Remove the loop from automatic control, then press OK.

Press OK when warned that this will affect sensor calibration.

Press OK when Apply 0 input to sensor. display appears.

You will receive a message telling you that the sensor input is stabilizing, then the sensor zero
succeeded.
Return the loop to automatic control, then press OK.

8 Press HOME to return to Online menu. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.

9 Close equalizer valve C.

10 Open valve B and LP block-off valve to begin measuring process differential pressure.

11 Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
applied input pressure.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitters configuration data and change its range setting, if necessary.
If device is not Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release skip to step 16.

12* On the next prompt Please enter Calibration Date, enter the date in the format
MM/DD/YYYY (ex: 05/27/2009), then press Enter

13* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time in 24 Hr Clock format (Hour
field), enter the hour portion of the calibration time in the 24 Hr format HH (ex: 13), then press
Enter

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 81


7 Start-up - Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter

Step Action

14* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field), enter the Minutes
field MM (ex: 56), then press Enter

15* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time (Second field), enter the
Seconds field SS (ex: 56), then press Enter

16 When prompted, return loop to automatic control. Press Enter.

17 Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.

*HART 6 Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release only with the Universal Rev 6, Field Device Rev
5 and Software Rev 36.
For details about these parameters refer to Diagnostics/Service - Calibration Records under the
Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release topic.

Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter


Procedure
The procedure in Table 31 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter in a
pressure measurement application. Refer to Figure 32 for the piping arrangement identification and
Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter connections.

Valve D

Plug C

Valve A
H
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter

HP side

HP Vent LP side
LP Vent

Figure 32 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type


Transmitter

82 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


7 Start-up - Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter

Table 31 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement

Step Action

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If


possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.

2 Close valve D.
Refer to Figure 32 for sample piping arrangement.

3 Open plug C and valve A to apply head pressure H to meter body. Then, open LP vent.
Allow system to stabilize at head pressure

4 At Online menu, read present LRV setting.

5 From Online menu, step through the following menu selections:


Device setup

Diag/Service

Calibration

Apply values

You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue

6 When the following display appears,

ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:

1 4mA
2 20mA
3 Exit

ABORT ENTER

choose 4mA, then press ENTER.


A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.

7 When Current applied process value display appears, choose Set as 4mA value then press
ENTER.

8 When the display in Step 6 appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.

9 Press HOME to return to the Online display.

10 From Online menu, step through the following menu selections:


Device setup

Process variables

11 At Process variables display, read 0% output for corresponding zero line pressure plus head

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 83


7 Start-up - Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter

Step Action
pressure H. Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.

12 Close plug C

13 Open valve D to begin measuring process line pressure.

14 Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
applied line pressure.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitters configuration data and change its range setting if needed.

15 Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.

84 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


7 Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement Vented Tank

Liquid Level Measurement Vented Tank


Procedure
The procedure in Table 32 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter in a
liquid level measurement application for a vented tank with a dry reference leg. Refer to Figure 33 for the
piping arrangement identification and Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter connections.

Valve A

Plug C

To HP connection
on meter body
Tap location at
the minimum level H
to be measured

Differential
Pressure
Transmitter

LP Vent

Figure 33 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter and Vented Tank

ATTENTION

For the procedure in Table 31, we are assuming that the tank is empty and the piping
arrangement includes a block-off valve.

Table 32 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank

Step Action

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If


possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.

2 Close block-off valve A.


Refer to Figure 33 for sample piping arrangement.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 85


7 Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement Vented Tank

Step Action

3 Open plug C.
Allow system to stabilize at head pressure.

4 At Online menu, read present LRV setting.

5 From Online menu, step through the following menu selections:


Device setup

Diag/Service

Calibration

Apply values

You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.

6 When the following display appears,

ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:

1 4mA
2 20mA
3 Exit

ABORT ENTER

choose 4mA, then press ENTER.


A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.

7 When Current applied process value display appears, choose Set as 4mA value then press
ENTER.

8 When the display in Step 6 appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.

9 Press HOME to return to the Online display.

10 From Online menu, step through the following menu selections:


Device setup

Process variables

11 At Process variables display, read 0% output for corresponding empty tank pressure plus
head pressure H. Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.

12 Close plug C.

13 Open valve A to begin measuring tank pressure. Leave LP side vented to atmosphere.

ATTENTION

If the URV was calculated on the approximate density of the liquid and/or tank height, the
exact URV can be set by filling the tank to the desired full scale level and then setting the URV
through the communicator. See Range Values in Section 6 for details.

86 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


7 Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank

Step Action

14 Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
applied tank level pressure.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitters configuration data and change its range setting, if needed.

15 Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.

Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank


Procedure
The procedure in Table 33 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter in a
liquid level measurement application for a pressurized tank with a liquid-filled (wet) reference leg. Refer to
Figure 34 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter
connections.

Valve B Plug D

Plug C at
zero level
Valve A

H1

Tap location at the


minimum level to be
measured h
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter

HP side of transmitter

Figure 34 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter and Pressurized Tank.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 87


7 Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank

ATTENTION

For the procedure in Table 33, we are assuming:


The tank is empty and the reference leg is filled.
The high pressure (HP) side of the transmitter is connected to the wet reference leg. Note
that the transmitter will work if the HP side is connected to the bottom of the tank, but not
within the guaranteed accuracy specifications.
The transmitter is mounted below the zero level of the tank, so h is greater than zero. If h
equals zero, plug C is eliminated from the piping and the LP vent is opened instead.

Table 33 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank

Step Action

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If


possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.

2 Close block-off valves A and B.


Refer to Figure 34 for sample piping arrangement.

3 Open plugs C and D.


Allow system to stabilize at head pressure.

4 At Online menu, read present LRV setting.

5 From Online menu, step through the following menu selections:


Device setup

Diag/Service

Calibration

Apply values

You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.

6 When the following display appears,

ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:

1 4mA
2 20mA
3 Exit

ABORT ENTER

choose 4mA, then press ENTER.


A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.

88 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


7 Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank

Step Action

7 When Current applied process value display appears, choose Set as 4mA value then press
ENTER.

8 When the display in Step 6 appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.

9 Press HOME to return to the Online display.

10 From Online menu, step through the following menu selections:


Device setup

Process variables

11 At Process variables display, read 0% output for corresponding empty tank pressure plus
head pressure H1. Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.

12 If you cannot fill tank, then go to Step 13

If you can fill tank to desired full-scale level, then go to Step 14

13 Key in URV that is equal to full tank pressure. See Range values in Section 6 for details on
keying in a range value.
Go to Step 24

14 Close plugs C and D.

15 Open valves A and B. Fill tank to desired full scale level.

16 At Online menu (if applicable, press HOME to get there), read present URV setting.

17 From Online menu, step through the following menu selections:


Device setup

Diag/Service

Calibration

Apply values

You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.

18 When the following display appears,

ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:

1 4mA
2 20mA
3 Exit

ABORT ENTER

choose 20mA, then press ENTER.


A display will prompt you to apply new 20 mA input. Press OK.

19 When Current applied process value display appears, choose Set as 20mA value then
press ENTER.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 89


7 Start-up - Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter

Step Action

20 When the display in Step 18 appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.

21 Press HOME to return to the Online display.

22 From Online menu, step through the following menu selections:


Device setup

Process variables

23 At Process variables display, read 100% output for corresponding full tank pressure applied.
Check that milliammeter reading is 20 mA (100%) output.

24 Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
empty and full tank pressures.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitters configuration data and change its range setting, if needed.
Ranging the transmitter in this way makes it reverse acting.

25 Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.

Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter


Procedure
The procedure in Table 34 outlines the steps for starting up a gauge pressure (GP) type transmitter in a
pressure or liquid level measurement application. Refer to Figure 35 and Figure 36 for the piping
arrangement identification and Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter connections..

Block-off Pipe Union


valve no.1 Plug

Gauge
Pressure
Transmitter

Process Block-off
valve no.2 Tee connector

Figure 35 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type


Transmitter

90 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


7 Start-up - Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter

To Process Head
connection on
meter body

Block-off
valve Gauge
Pressure
Transmitter

Tap location at the minimum


level to be measured

Figure 36 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP Type
Transmitter.

ATTENTION

For the procedure in Table 34, we are assuming that piping arrangement includes a block-off
valve and a Tee-connector. If your piping does not include a Tee-connector, you can only
verify that the input and output readings correlate.

Table 34 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement

Step Action

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If


possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.

2 Close block-off valve.


Refer to Figure 35 or Figure 36 for sample piping arrangement.

3 Remove plug from Tee-connector to vent it to atmosphere, if applicable.


Allow system to stabilize at static pressure.

4 At Online menu, read applied input pressure (PV) which should be zero.
Also read PV analog output which should be 4 mA to correspond with 0% output.

5 Optional (read output in % of range): From Online menu, step through the following menu
selections:
Device setup
Process variables
At Process variables display, read 0% output for corresponding input pressure. Check that
milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 91


7 Start-up - Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter

Step Action

6 If communicator and milliammeter readings are zero (4 mA), then go to Step 9.


If communicator and milliammeter readings are not zero (4 mA) and Tee-connector is level with
transmitter, then go to Step 7
If communicator and milliammeter readings are not zero (4 mA) and Tee-connector is above
transmitter, then go to Step 8

7 From Online menu (if applicable, press HOME to get there), step through the following menu
selections:
Device setup

Diag/Service

Calibration

Zero trim

Under Zero trim do the following when prompted:


Remove the loop from automatic control, then press OK.

Press OK when warned that this will affect sensor calibration.

Press OK when Apply 0 input to sensor. display appears.

You will receive a message telling you that the sensor input is stabilizing, then the sensor zero
succeeded.
Return the loop to automatic control, then press OK.

Go to Step 9.

8 From Online menu (if applicable, press HOME to get there), step through the following menu
selections:
Device setup

Diag/Service
Calibration
Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
When the following display appears,

ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:

1 4mA
2 20mA
3 Exit

ABORT ENTER

choose 4mA, then press ENTER.


A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.
When Current applied process value display appears, choose Set as 4mA value then press
ENTER.

92 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


7 Start-up - Pressure Measurement with AP

Step Action

8, When the display above appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
contd Return the loop to automatic control.

9 Close Tee-connector and slowly open block-off valve to apply process pressure to transmitter.

10 Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
zero and full-scale pressures.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitters configuration data and change its range setting if needed.
If device is not Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release skip to step 15.

11* On the next prompt Please enter Calibration Date, enter the date in the format
MM/DD/YYYY (ex: 05/27/2009), then press Enter

12* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time in 24 Hr Clock format (Hour
field), enter the hour portion of the calibration time in the 24 Hr format HH (ex: 13), then press
Enter

13* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field), enter the Minutes
field MM (ex: 56), then press Enter

14* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time (Second field), enter the
Seconds field SS (ex: 56), then press Enter

15 When prompted, return loop to automatic control. Press Enter.

16 Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.

Pressure Measurement with AP


Procedure
The procedure in Table 35 outlines the steps for starting up an absolute pressure (AP). type transmitter in a
pressure measurement application. Refer to Figure 37 for the piping arrangement identification and
Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter connections.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 93


7 Start-up - Pressure Measurement with AP

Shut-off Pipe Union


valve no.1 Plug

Absolute
Pressure
Transmitter
Shut-off
valve no.2

Process Tee connector


For additional overrrange protection, use
Sprague engineering type gauge saver or
Fairchild model 95 gauge guard (style 1)

Figure 37 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type


Transmitter

94 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


7 Start-up - Pressure Measurement with AP

ATTENTION

For AP transmitters, you can only verify that the input and output readings correlate.

Table 35 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement.


Step

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If


possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop.

2 Set process pressure to zero level, if possible.


Allow system to stabilize at zero pressure.

3 At Online menu, read applied input pressure (PV) which should be zero level.
Also read PV analog output which should be 4 mA to correspond with 0% output.

4 Optional (read output in % of range):


Read barometric pressure and confirm with local source, (for example, weather station, airport,
or other reference).

5 From Online menu, step through the following menu selections:


Device setup

Process variables

6 At Process variables display, read output. Compare local reference pressure with transmitter
in % of span. Check that milliammeter reading corresponds to output.

7 Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
zero and full-scale pressures.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitters configuration data and change its range setting if needed.

8 Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 95


7 Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals

Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals


Procedure
The procedure in Table 36 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter
with remote diaphragm seals in a liquid level measurement application.. Refer to Figure 38 for the piping
arrangement identification and Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter connections.

LP Side

Full Level

H2 Differential
Fixed Pressure Variable
Ref. Leg Transmitter with Head H1
remote seals

Zero Level (empty)

HP Side

Figure 38 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter with Remote Seals

ATTENTION

For the procedure in Table 36, we are assuming that


The tank is empty and the remote seal flanges are installed at their final positions.

The DP transmitter has its high pressure (HP) side connected to the tanks lower flange and
low pressure (LP) side connected to the upper flange.

Table 36 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement

Step Action

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If


possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.

96 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


7 Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals

Step Action

2 If you cannot empty tank, then go to Step 3.

If you can empty tank, then go Step 4.

3 Key in LRV that is equal to empty tank pressure. See Section 6.7 in this manual for details on
keying in a range value.
Go to Step 7.
You can use this formula to calculate LRV in inH2O.
LRV = (H2 x Sf) x 1
H2 = Height of fixed reference leg in inches.
Sf = Specific gravity of remote seal fill fluid.
The LRV calculation must be multiplied by 1 since pressure in on the low side of the meter
body.
EXAMPLE: If H2 equaled 12 feet and the fill fluid was silicone oil, substituting into the formula
yields: LRV = (12 ft x 12 in x 0.94) x 1
LRV = 135.36 inH2O

ATTENTION

The specific gravity of silicone oil fill fluid (DC200) is 0.94 and fluorolube fill fluid (CTFE) is
1.84.

4 If applicable, press HOME to return to Online menu. Step through the following menu
selections:
Device setup
Diag/Service
Calibration
Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
When the following display appears,

ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:

1 4mA
2 20mA
3 Exit

ABORT ENTER

choose 4mA, then press ENTER.


A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.
When Current applied process value display appears, choose Set as 4mA value then press
ENTER. LRV is set to fixed reference leg pressure H2 times density of remote seal fill fluid
multiplied by 1 (pressure on low side of meter body).
When the display above appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 97


7 Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals

Step Action

5 Press HOME to return to Online menu. Read applied input pressure (PV) which should be
zero.
Also read PV analog output which should be 4 mA to correspond with 0% output.

6 Optional (read output in % of range): From Online menu, step through the following menu
selections:
Device setup

Process variables

At Process variables display, read 0% output for corresponding empty tank pressure plus
reference pressure H2. Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.

7 If you cannot fill tank, then go to Step 8.

If you can fill tank, then go Step 9.

8 Key in URV that is equal to full tank pressure. See Range Values in Section 6 for details on
keying in a range value.
Go to Step 12.
You can use these formulas to calculate URV in inH2O.
Span = H1 x SL
H1 = Height of variable head in inches.
SL = Specific gravity of measured liquid.
URV = Span + LRV
EXAMPLE: If H1 equaled 10 feet, the measured liquid was water, and the LRV equaled
135.36 inH2O; substituting into the formulas yields:
Span = 10 ft x 12 in x 1.00
Span = 120 inH2O
URV = 120 inH2O + 135.36 inH2O
URV = 15.36 inH2O

ATTENTION

The specific gravity of water at 60F (15.6C) is 1.00.

9 From Online menu (if applicable, press HOME to get there), step through the following menu
selections:
Device setup

Diag/Service

Calibration

Apply values

You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.

98 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012


7 Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals

Step Action

9, When the following display appears,


contd
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:

1 4mA
2 20mA
3 Exit

ABORT ENTER

choose 20mA, then press ENTER.


A display will prompt you to apply new 20 mA input. Press OK.
When Current applied process value display appears, choose Set as 20mA value then
press ENTER. URV is set to full tank pressure.
When the display above appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.

10 Press HOME to return to Online menu. With full tank pressure applied, read PV analog
output which should be 20 mA to correspond with 100% output.

11 Optional (read output in % of range): From Online menu, step through the following menu
selections:
Device setup

Process variables

At Process variables display, read 100% output for corresponding full tank. Check that
milliammeter reading is 20 mA (100%) output.

12 Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
empty and full tank pressures.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitters configuration data and change its range setting if needed.

13 Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 99


8 Operation - Introduction

8 Operation

Introduction
About this section
This section identifies how to access typical data associated with the operation of an ST 3000 transmitter.
It also includes procedures for:
changing the default failsafe direction of the transmitters output,
changing the read/write access of the transmitters configuration database, and
saving and/or restoring a transmitters configuration database.

Accessing Operation Data


Summary
You can access this data relevant to the operation of the transmitter using a hand-held communicator.

Input Failsafe Output Direction


Output in % or milliamperes Sensor Temperature
Upper and Lower Range Limits Messages
Status
Table 37 summarizes the steps required to access given operation data from the transmitter. These steps
assume that communicator communications have been established with the transmitter. All steps start at the
Online (or HOME) display. The values shown in displays are for example purposes only.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 101
8 Operation - Accessing Operation Data

Table 37 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access

What you want to view What to do


Present input pressure. Read PV from Online display.

ST3000: PT 3011
Online

1 Device setup
2 PV 0.00745 inH2O
3 PV AO 11.989 mA
4 PV LRV 12.5 inH2O
5 PV URV 12.5 inH2O

You may need to select PV and press the right


arrow key to view PV value.(See Note.)

Present transmitter output in percent. Select: Device setup


Process variables
Read Pres % rnge from Process variables
display.

ST3000: PT 3011
Process variables

1 Pres 0.00745 inH2O


2 % rnge 49.95%
3 AO 11.992 mA
4 SV 23.50 degC
5* Electronics Temperature 20.69 degC
6** Static Pressure 14.50 psi

HELP HOME

*HART 6 Advanced Diagnostics For ST


3000 Release only with the Universal Rev
6, Field Device Rev 5 and Software Rev 36
** Future Feature to be added for DP meter
body type; static pressure is 0.0 for AP and
GP type meter bodies.
For more details, refer to Process Variables
Parameters under the Advanced
Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release topic.

102 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
8 Operation - Accessing Operation Data

Present transmitter output in milliamperes. Read PV AO from Online display.

ST3000: PT 3011
Online

1 Device setup
2 PV 0.00745 inH2O
3 PV AO 11.989 mA
4 PV LRV 12.5 inH2O
5 PV URV 12.5 inH2O

Upper and Lower Range Limits of the transmitter. Select: Device Setup
Basic Setup
Range Values

Read PV LRL and PV URL from Range values


display.

ST3000: PT 3011
Range values

1 PV LRV 12.5 inH2O


2 PV URV 12.5 inH2O
3 PV LRL 0.00 inH2O
4 PV URL 400.7 inH2O
5* PV LTL -800.14 inH20
6* PV UTL 800.12 inH20

HELP

You may need to select PV LRL and PV URL and


press the right arrow key to view the values. (See
Note.)

*only available on HART 6 release transmitters

Status of transmitter operation at the present Select: Device setup


time. Diag/Service
Device status
Select either Critical or Non-Critical from the
Device status display.
Additionally, an Info category is available for
Advanced Diagnostics Release for ST 3000
only.
Warnings, status messages, and error messages
appear on screen as necessary. Refer to Section
11 in this manual for further information.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 103
8 Operation - Accessing Operation Data

Present failsafe output direction, which depends Select: Device setup


on the position of the internal failure mode alarm Detailed setup
jumper. Output condition
Analog output
Read AO Alrm typ from Analog output display.

ST3000: PT 3011
Analog output

1 AO 11.990 mA
2 AO Alrm typ Hi
3 Loop test
4 D/A trim
5 Scaled D/A trim
HELP HOME

Present sensor temperature (5C) measured by Choose: Device setup


circuitry in the transmitters sensor. Detailed setup
Sensors
Read SV from Sensors display

ST3000: PT 3011
Sensors

1 PV -0.0134 inH2O
2 PV unit inH2O
3 Sensor information
4 SV 23.42 degC
5 SV unit degC
HELP HOME

Present information in the message (or Choose: Device setup


scratchpad) area. Basic setup
Device information
Message
Read present information in Message display.

ST3000: PT 3011
Message

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
CALIBRATED BY JOE 12 02 98

HELP DEL ESC ENTER

Note: Some values for PV, PV LRV and PV URV may not be visible in some displays, (due to the limitations
of the communicator display). To view these values you must use the down arrow key to select the
value and then press the right arrow key to display the value in detail.

104 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
8 Operation - Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers

Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers


Default failsafe direction
Transmitters are shipped with a default failsafe direction of upscale. This means that the transmitters
output will be driven upscale (maximum output) when the transmitter detects a critical status.
The upscale failsafe action will drive an analog transmitters output to 20.8 mA or a downscale action will
drive its output to 3.8 mA.

The HART communicator parameter PV AO Alrm Typ identifies the failsafe direction of the transmitter.
The parameter indicates failsafe action as either Hi (upscale) or Lo (downscale).

Write protect option


Transmitters are shipped with a default jumper position for read and write access. This means that the
transmitters configuration database can be overwritten.

Procedure
The procedure in outlines the steps for cutting the failsafe jumper and/or repositioning the write protect
jumper on the transmitters Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA). Figure 39 shows the location of the jumpers
on the PWA of ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters.

ESD HAZARD

The nature of the integrated circuitry used in the transmitters PWA makes it susceptible to
damage by stray static discharges when it is removed from the transmitter. Follow these tips to
minimize chances of static electricity damage when handling the PWA.
Never touch terminals, connectors, component leads, or circuits when handling the PWA.
When removing or installing the PWA, hold it by its edges or mounting bracket only. If you
must touch the PWA circuits, be sure you are grounded by staying in contact with a
grounded surface or wearing a grounded wrist strap.

As soon as the PWA is removed from the transmitter, put it in an electrically conductive bag
or wrap it in aluminum foil to protect it.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 105
8 Operation - Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers

Figure 39 Location of Failsafe and Write Protect Jumpers on PWA

Table 38 Changing Default Failsafe Direction

Step Action

1 Turn OFF transmitter power. Loosen end-cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side
of transmitter housing.

2 If equipped with a local smart meter, carefully turn smart meter counterclockwise to remove it
from PWA mounting bracket and unplug cable from connector on back of meter assembly.

3 Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket and PWA from housing.
Using the retaining clip, unplug flex tape connector and 2-wire power connector from PWA,
and remove PWA. See figure.

Connectors

Retaining Clip

Electronics
PWA Housing

106 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
8 Operation - Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers

ATTENTION

The PWA board has components on both sides. The failsafe jumper is located on the side with
the most components, which is also the same side as the flex tape and power connector pins.

4 With the PWA component side (from which you unplugged the flex tape and power
connectors) facing you and referring to Figure 39, locate
Failsafe jumper (W1).
If you want to change the failsafe action from upscale to downscale, cut jumper in half with
a small wire cutter.

5 Reverse steps 2 and 3 to reassemble mounting bracket and PWA in transmitter housing.

ATTENTION

Be sure to orient local smart meter for proper viewing through end-cap window. You can rotate
the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments.

6 We recommend that you lubricate end-cap O-ring with silicon grease such as Dow Corning
#33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.

7 Turn ON transmitter power.

Table 39 Changing Write Protect Jumper

Step Action

1 Turn OFF transmitter power. Loosen end-cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side
of transmitter housing.

2 If equipped with a smart meter, carefully turn smart meter counterclockwise to remove it from
PWA mounting bracket. Move the smart meter to one side in order to gain access to the write
protect jumper. Refer to Figure 39.

3 Reposition the write protect jumper as required. See Figure 36 for jumper positions.

4 Reverse step 2 to reassemble smart meter if applicable.

ATTENTION

Be sure to locate smart meter for proper viewing through end-cap window. You can rotate the
meter mounting in 90 degree increments.

5 We recommend that you lubricate end cap O-ring with silicone grease such as Dow Corning
#33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.

6 Replace end cap.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 107
8 Operation - Writing Data in the Message Area

Writing Data in the Message Area


The message area is a 32-character field containing such information as transmitter location, service,
record, scratchpad, etc. This data can be entered using the communicator.
The procedure in Table 40 outlines the steps for entering a sample message. This procedure assumes that
communicator communications have been established with the transmitter.

Table 40 Writing Data in the Message Area

Step Action

1 Starting at the Online menu, choose (by highlighting and pressing the right arrow key) the
following menu selections:
Device setup

Basic setup

Device information

Message

A display similar to the one below will appear.

ST3000: PT 3011
Message

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
CALIBRATED BY JOE 12 02 98

HELP DEL ESC ENTER

2 Using the alphanumeric keypad, enter desired message. What you are entering will overwrite
the previous message in the highlighted area. If you make a mistake, press DEL to delete
character beneath blinking cursor.
Refer to Making changes in Section 6 for information on using the alphanumeric keypad and
alpha position indicator arrow keys.

3 Press ENTER to save data in message area. (If you press ESC, you will exit message area
without saving change.)

4 When all desired changes have been made, press SEND to download changes from the
communicator memory to the transmitter.

108 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
8 Operation - Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database

Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database


Background
If it ever becomes necessary to replace a damaged transmitter with a spare, you can save the configuration
database from the damaged transmitter to the memory module or data pack installed in the communicator,
then restore (or send) the saved configuration database from that memory to the spare transmitter. In fact,
you can restore the saved configuration database in any number of transmitters as long as you change the
tag number (ID) in the restored database.
Figure 40 shows a graphic summary of the save and restore database function.

Saved Configuration Database Restored Configuration Database

Pressure unit inH2O Pressure unit inH2O


Pres damp 0.48 s Pres damp 0.48 s
Pres URV 400 inH2O Pres URV 400 inH2O
Pres LRV 0 inH2O Pres LRV 0 inH2O
Pres xfer fnctn Linear Pres xfer fnctn Linear
Temp unit degC Temp unit degC
Tag PT3011 Tag PT3011
Message Tank Pressure Message Tank Pressure

Working Memory Module Working


Memory or Memory
Data Pack

SAVE SEND

ST 3000 Communicator ST 3000

Figure 40 Summary of Save and Restore Database Function

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 109
8 Operation - Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database

Procedures
The procedure in Table 41 outlines the steps for saving a configuration database from a transmitter.
Table 42 provides the procedure for downloading (sending) a saved configuration database to a transmitter.

Table 41 Saving a Configuration Database

Step Action

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring for transmitter with configuration database to be
saved and turn it on.

2 Starting at the Online menu, choose SAVE. The Save as . . . screen will appear.

ST3000:PT 3011
Save as . . .

1 Location Module
2 Name
3 Data Type Standard

HELP SAVE

3 Select Location and choose the memory location where you want to save the transmitter
configuration, (Module, data pack or PC, if available). Press ENTER.

4 Select Name and type in the name of the configuration file. Press ENTER.

5 Select Data Type and choose either Standard or Full (for PC). Press ENTER.

6 Press SAVE. A prompt may say that some variables in this configuration were not marked
because they were not read. Press OK.
A prompt may ask if you want to overwrite the existing configuration memory.
Press YES or NO.
The Online screen will appear when save is completed.

7 Disconnect communicator from transmitter loop wiring and turn communicator off.

110 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
8 Operation - Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database

Table 42 Downloading a Configuration Database

Step Action

1 Connect communicator to loop wiring for transmitter whose database is to be restored and turn
it on.

2 Back out to Offline display, select Saved Configuration to show the following display.

HART Communicator
Saved Configuration

1 Module Contents
2 data pack Contents
3 PC

HELP

3 Select the memory location of the saved configuration file and press the right arrow key.

4 Select the file name of the saved configuration. Press the right arrow key.

5 The Saved configuration display appears.

HART Communicator
Saved Configuration

1 Edit
2 Copy to . . .
3 Send
4 Print
5 Delete
HELP

Select Send and press right arrow key.


When prompted to put loop into manual, press OK.
The selected configuration is downloaded (sent) to the transmitters memory.

6 Back out to Offline display, then choose Online. You can now change the tag number and
other configuration data, as required.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 111
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Introduction

9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release

Introduction
About this section
This section provides information about the Advanced Diagnostic features added to the ST 3000 Device.
Advanced Diagnostic features are available with ST 3000 HART 6.x firmware revision 3.6 and later.

Advanced Diagnostics are not available in ST 3000 HART 5.x devices

Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics

What you want to view What to do

Power up Diagnostics Select Online\Device

Electronics Temperature Tracking Diagnostics Setup\Diagnostics/Service\Advanced Diagnostics

Operating Voltage Diagnostics


Process Variable Tracking Diagnostics
Meter Body Temperature Tracking Diagnostics
Static Pressure Tracking Diagnostics

Power Up Diagnostics
Power fail count Parameter Description Total number of power-ups experienced by
the unit.

Set-up None initialized to zero prior to leaving


factory.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note


2.

Note Only one power failure in each 24 hour period


is counted.

Time since last Method Description Displays time since last power-up in minutes.
power fail
Set-up None.

NVM None timer is restarted each power-up.

112 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics

Electronics Temperature Tracking Diagnostics

Maximum Electronics Temperature Tracking

Max ET Limit Parameter Description ET (Electronics Temperature upper operating limit from specification.

Units are same degree units as has been selected for SV (Secondary
Variable).

Set-up None.

ET Upper Description Actual limit used in Time Above Limit and Time Since Last Event.
Stress Limit Value is equal to Max ET Limit less 10% of range limits.

Example ET range is -40F to 185F for a total of 225F.

ET Upper Stress Limit

= 185F - 10% of 225F = 162.5F.

Set-up None calculation is automatic.

Max ET Value Parameter Description Highest ET ever experienced by the device.

Units are same degree units as has been selected for SV (Secondary
Variable).

Set-up None.

NVM Update only if change greater than 0.5C.

Time Above Parameter Description Accumulation of minutes that devices ET has been above the value
Limit of ET Upper Stress Limit.

Set-up None.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

Time Since Method Description Time that has passed since the last time devices ET has passed
Last Event above the value of ET Upper Stress Limit (in days, hours and
minutes).

Set-up None.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 113
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics

Minimum Electronics Temperature Tracking

Min ET Limit Parameter Description ET (Electronics Temperature) lower operating


limit from specification.

Units are same degree units as has been


selected for SV (Secondary Variable).

Set-up None.

ET Lower Stress Description Actual limit used in Time Below Limit and
Limit Time Since Last Event. Value is equal to
Min ET Limit plus 10% of range limits.

Example ET range is -40C to 85C for a total of 125C.

ET Lower Stress Limit

= -40C + 10% of 125C = -27.5C.

Set-up None calculation is automatic.

Min ET Value Parameter Description Lowest ET ever experienced by the device.

Units are same degree units as has been


selected for SV (Secondary Variable).

Set-up None.

NVM Update only if change greater than 0.5C.

Time Below Limit Parameter Description Accumulation of minutes that devices ET has
been below the value of ET Lower Stress
Limit.

Set-up None.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

Time Since Last Method Description Time that has passed since the last time
Event devices ET has passed below the value of ET
Lower Stress Limit (in days, hours, and
minutes).

Set-up None.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

114 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics

Operating Voltage Diagnostics


Current Op Voltage Parameter Description Supply operating voltage available at device
terminals.

Set-up None units always in volts.

NVM None.

Note No accuracy is specified for this


measurement!

This value is intended to be used for


informational purposes only and should
not be used for control.

Min Op Voltage Parameter Description Minimum operating voltage experienced by


device at terminals since last reset of
operating voltage parameters.

Set-up User can reset as desired using method


described in item below.

NVM Update only if change greater than 0.125


volts.

Time Since Last Method Description Displays time since last minimum operating
Event voltage event in minutes.

Set-up User can reset as desired using method


described in item below.

NVM Update only if Min OP Voltage changes by


greater than 0.125 volts.

Reset Operating Method Description Causes Min Op Voltage to be set to 32 volts


Voltage and Time Since Last Event to be reset to
Parameters zero. Within a short period of time Min Op
Voltage will assume operating voltage value.

Set-up User actuates as desired.

Low operating Status Description Status bit #01 of MISC STATUSES is set if
voltage warning operating voltage available at screw terminals
is less than 10V.

Set-up None.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 115
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics

PV Tracking Diagnostics
Maximum PV (Pressure) Tracking

UTL Parameter Description Pressure upper operating limit from specification


in units as selected by user for PV. (Upper
(Max PV Limit) Transducer Limit).

Set-up None.

PV Upper Stress Method Description for DP Actual limit value used in Time Above Limit and
Limit type Time Since Last Event. Value is equal to PV
Upper Stress Limit less 10% of range limits.

Example for DP For STD120 span is 0 to 400 inH2O.


Type
Range is 400 inH2O settable within

LTL = -800 inH2O to UTL = 800 inH2O limits.

PV Upper Stress Limit =

800 inH2O - 160 inH2O = 640 inH2O.

Example for AP and For STA140 allowable working pressure is 0 to


GP Types 500 psia.

Withstand Pressure from LTL = 0 to UTL = 750


psia.

PV Upper Stress Limit = 750 psia 75 psia =


675 psia.

Set-up None calculation is automatic.

Max PV Value Parameter Description Maximum PV that the device has experienced in
user selected units.

Set-up None. Value initialized to Min PV Limit value


prior to leaving the factory. Updates to current
PV automatically when powered at user site.

NVM Update only if change greater than 1/8000 of


range.

Time Above Limit Parameter Description Accumulation of minutes that pressure


measured by the device has been above PV
Upper Stress Limit.

Set-up None initialized to zero prior to leaving the


factory.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

Time Since Last Method Description Time that has passed since the last time
Event devices PV passed above PV Upper Stress
Limit (in days, hours and minutes).

Set-up None initialized to zero prior to leaving the


factory.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

116 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics

Minimum PV (Pressure) Tracking

LTL Parameter Description Pressure lower operating limit from specification in


units selected by user for PV. (Lower Transducer
(Min PV Limit) Limit).

Set-up None.

PV Lower Method Description Actual limit value used in Time Below Limit and Time
Stress Limit Since Last Event. Value is equal to Min PV Limit
plus 10% of range limits for DP type devices and zero
for GP and AP type devices.

Example for DP Type For STD120 span is 0 to 400 inH2O.

Range is 400 inH2O settable within

LTL = -800 inH2O to UTL = 800 inH2O limits.

PV Lower Stress Limit =

-800 inH2O + 160 inH2O = -640 inH2O.

Example for AP and GP For STA140 allowable working pressure is 0 to 500


Types psia.

Withstand Pressure from LTL = 0 to UTL = 750 psia.

PV Lower Stress Limit = 0 psia.

Set-up None calculation is automatic.

Min PV Value Parameter Description Minimum PV that the device has experienced in user
selected units.

Set-up None. Value initialized to Max PV Limit value prior to


leaving the factory. Updates to current PV
automatically when powered at user site.

NVM Update only if change greater than 1/8000 of range.

Time Below Parameter Description Accumulation of minutes that pressure measured by


Limit the device has been below the value of PV Lower
Stress Limit.

Set-up None.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

Time Since Method Description Time that has passed since the last time devices PV
Last Event passed below the value of PV Lower Stress Limit (in
days, hours and mintues).

Set-up None initialized to zero prior to leaving the factory.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 117
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics

Meter Body Temperature Tracking Diagnostics


Maximum Meter Body Temperature Tracking
(Note that Meter Body temperature is also known as Process temperature or Secondary Variable).

Max MBT Parameter Description MBT upper operating limit from specification.
Limit
Set-up None.

MBT Upper Method Description Actual limit used in Time Above Limit and Time Since Last Event.
Stress Limit Value is equal to Max MBT Limit less 10% of range limits.

Example MBT range is -40C to 125C for a total of 165C.

MBT Upper Stress Limit

= 125C 10% of 165C = 108.5C.

Set-up None calculation is automatic.

Max MBT Parameter Description Highest MBT ever experienced by the device.
Value
Set-up None - value initialized to Min MBT Limit value prior to leaving the
factory. Updates to current MBT automatically when powered at user
site.

NVM Update only if change greater than 0.02C.

Time Above Parameter Description Accumulation of minutes that devices MBT has been above the value of
Limit MBT Upper Stress Limit.

Set-up None.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

Time Since Method Description Time that has passed since the last time devices MBT has passed
Last Event above the value of MBT Upper Stress Limit (in days, hours and
minutes).

Set-up None.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

Minimum Meter Body Temperature Tracking

(Note that Meter Body temperature is also known as Process temperature or Secondary Variable).

Min MBT Limit Parameter Description MBT lower operating limit from specification.

Set-up None.

MBT Lower Method Description Actual limit used in Time Below Limit and Time Since Last Event.
Stress Limit Value is equal to Min MBT Limit plus 10% of range limits.

Example MBT range is -40F to 257F for a total of 297F.

MBT Lower Stress Limit

= -40F + 10% of 297F = -10.3F.

Set-up None calculation is automatic.

Min MBT Parameter Description Lowest MBT ever experienced by the device.

118 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics

Value Set-up None - value initialized to Max MBT Limit value prior to leaving the
factory. Updates to current MBT automatically when powered at user
site.

NVM Update only if change greater than 0.02C.

Time Below Parameter Description Accumulation of minutes that devices MBT has been below the value of
Limit MBT Lower Stress Limit.

Set-up None.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

Time Since Method Description Time that has passed since the last time devices MBT has passed
Last Event below the value of MBT Lower Stress Limit (in days, hours, and
minutes).

Set-up None.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

Static Pressure Tracking Diagnostics


Static Pressure Limits

Max SP Limit Parameter Description Static Pressure upper operating limit specification.

Units are always PSI (pounds per square inch).

Set-up None.

Min SP Limit Parameter Description Static Pressure lower operating limit specification.

Units are always PSI (pounds per square inch).

Set-up None.

SP Upper Description Actual limit used in Time Above Limit and Time Since Last Event.
Stress Limit Value is equal to Max SP Limit less 10% of static pressure range

Example Static Pressure range is 0 to 4500 psi.

SP Upper Stress Limit

= 4500 psi - 450 psi = 4050 psi.

Set-up None calculation is automatic.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 119
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Calibration Records

Static Pressure Tracking Diagnostics

Max SP Parameter Description Highest SP ever experienced by the device.


Value
Units are always PSI (pounds per square inch).

Set-up None.

NVM Update only if change greater than 0.56 psi.

Time Above Parameter Description Accumulation of minutes that devices SP has been above the value of
Limit SP Upper Stress Limit.

Set-up None.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

Time Since Method Description Time that has passed since the last time devices SP has passed above
Last Event the value of SP Upper Stress Limit (in days, hours, and minutes).

Set-up None.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

Calibration Records
What you want to view What to do

Zero Trim Records Select Online\Device Setup\Diag/Service\Calibration

Correct LRV Records

Correct URV Records

Zero Trim Records


Last Zero Trim Method Description Date and Time of last zero trim field calibration.

(Date displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format)

Set-up User is prompted for date and time at end of each zero
trim procedure.

NVM Backup is immediate

Previous Zero Trim Method Description Date and time of zero trim field calibration that occurred
before the last zero trim field calibration.

See note 1 for format.

Set-up User is prompted for date and time at end of each zero
trim procedure.

NVM Backup is immediate

120 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Calibration Records

Correct LRV Records


Last Correct LRV Method Description Date and time of last Correct LRV field calibration.

(Date displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format)

Set-up User is prompted for date and time at end of each


Correct LRV procedure.

NVM Backup is immediate

Previous Correct Method Description Date and time of correct LRV field calibration that
LRV occurred before the last correct LRV field calibration.

See note 1 for format.

Set-up User is prompted for date and time at end of each


correct LRV procedure.

NVM Backup is immediate

Correct URV Records


Last Correct URV Method Description Date and time of last correct URV field calibration.

(Date displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format)

Set-up User is prompted for date and time at end of each


correct URV procedure.

NVM Backup is immediate

Previous Correct Method Description Date and time of correct URV field calibration that
URV occurred before the last correct URV field calibration.

(Date displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format)

Set-up User is prompted for date and time at end of each


correct URV procedure.

NVM Backup is immediate

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 121
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Process Variables Parameters

Process Variables Parameters


What you want to view What to do

Electronics Temperature Select Online\Device Setup\Process Variables

Static Pressure

Electronics Temperature
Electronics Parameter Description Temperature inside the electronics housing.
Temperature
Set-up None units same as for SV (Secondary Variable).

Note No accuracy is specified for this measurement! It is


certainly less than the accuracy for SV or meter body
temperature.

This value is intended to be used for informational


purposes only and should not be used for control.

Static Pressure
Static Parameter Description Working pressure also known as pressure on high
Pressure** side of the device for DP (Differential Pressure)
devices.

SP value for AP (Absolute Pressure) or GP (Guage


Pressure) type devices is always 0.

Set-up None - Units are always psi (pounds per square inch).

Note No accuracy is specified for this measurement!

It is certainly less than the accuracy for PV.

This value is intended to be used for informational


purposes only and should not be used for control.

122 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Basic Setup Device Info

Basic Setup Device Info


What you want to view What to do

Install Date Select Online\Device Setup\Basic Setup\Device


Information
Model Number

Materials Constr

Install Date
Install Date Parameter Description Date of device installation.

Set-up User enters a date once during device lifetime. Once


date is entered no further updates are possible and
value becomes read only and is permanently saved.

NVM Backup is immediate.

Note Date displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format

where mm=month, dd=day, yyyy=year

Model Number
Model Number Method Description Retrieve and display device model number information.
Includes Key Number, Table I, Table II and Table III.

Set-up None data preloaded at the factory.

Materials of Construction
Show Key Method Description Translates user supplied Key Number and Table I
Number portions of model number into information on device
type, range, and materials of contruction

Set-up User selects appropriate Key Number and Table I


portions of model number to obtain information about
device type, range, and materials of construction.

Show Flange Method Description Translates user supplied Table II portion of model
Assembly number into information about flange assembly types
Information and materials of construction (for flange units only)

Set-up User selects appropriate Table II portion of model


number to obtain information about flange types and
materials of construction (for flange units only).

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 123
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Review Parameters

Review Parameters
What you want to view What to do

Install Date Select Online\Device Setup\Review

Power Fail Count

Electronics Temperature

% Life in Stress

% Service Life Used

Static Pressure

Install Date
Install Date Parameter Description Date of device installation.

Set-up User enters a date once during device lifetime. Once


date is entered no further updates are possible and
value becomes read only and is permanently saved.

NVM Backup is immediate.

Note Date displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format

where mm=month, dd=day, yyyy=year

Power fail count


Power fail count Parameter Description Total number of power-ups experienced by the unit.

Set-up None initialized to zero prior to leaving factory.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

Note Only one power failure in each 24 hour period is counted.

Electronics Temperature
Electronics Parameter Description Temperature inside the electronics housing.
Temperature
Set-up None units same as for SV (Secondary Variable).

Note No accuracy is specified for this measurement! It is certainly


less than the accuracy for SV or meter body temperature.

This value is intended to be used for informational purposes


only and should not be used for control.

124 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Review Parameters

% Service Life in Stress


% Service Parameter Description Percent of service life spent in stressful conditions. Indicates the % of
Life in service life where one or more of PV, static pressure, meter body
Stress temperature or electronics temperature are within 10% of respective
range limits.

Set-up None.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

% Service Life Used


% Service Parameter Description Value is based on electronics temperature. Service life accumulates faster
Life Used at higher temperatures with an exponential relationship. At 25 degrees C
service life is expected to be approximately 27 years.

Set-up None.

NVM Backup once each 24 hour period see note 2.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 125
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Review Parameters

Static Pressure
Static Parameter Description Working pressure also known as pressure on high
Pressure** side of the device for DP (Differential Pressure)
devices.

SP value for AP (Absolute Pressure) or GP (Guage


Pressure) type devices is always 0.

Set-up None - Units are always psi (pounds per square inch).

Note No accuracy is specified for this measurement!

It is certainly less than the accuracy for PV.

This value is intended to be used for informational


purposes only and should not be used for control.

Note 1: Time and date format


Date and time are displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format where mm=month, dd=day, yyyy=year
and in HH:MM:SS format where HH=hours, MM=minutes, SS=seconds.
Note 2: These parameters are backed up in NVM memory once per day so that the maximum numbers of
writes, as specified by the NVMs manufacturer, are not exceeded during the lifetime of the
pressure transmitter. This means that when power to the device is lost and then re-applied the
value reverts back to the value that existed when last backed up to NVM. If the last backup had
occurred 23 hours and 59 minutes ago then a full days worth of data would be lost.
Note 3: ** Future Feature to be added for DP meter body type; static pressure is 0.0 for AP and GP type
meter bodies.

126 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
10 Maintenance - Introduction

10 Maintenance

Introduction
About this section
This section provides information about preventive maintenance routines and replacing damaged parts. The
topics covered in this section are:
Preventive maintenance of the meter body barrier diaphragms and process piping to the transmitter.
Replacement of damaged parts such as the transmitter PWA and meter body.

Preventive Maintenance
Maintenance routines and schedules
The ST 3000 transmitter itself does not require any specific maintenance routine at regularly scheduled
intervals. However, you should consider carrying out these typical inspection and maintenance routines on
a schedule that is dictated by the characteristics of the process medium being measured and whether blow-
down facilities or purge systems are being used.
Check piping for leaks.
Clear the piping of sediment or other foreign matter.
Clean the transmitters pressure chambers including the barrier diaphragms.

Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms


Depending on the characteristics of the process medium being measured, sediment or other foreign
particles may collect in the process head cavity/chamber and cause faulty measurement. In addition, the
barrier diaphragm or diaphragms in the transmitters meter body may become coated with a residue from
the process medium. The latter is also true for external diaphragms on flange mount and remote seal type
transmitters.
In most cases, you can readily remove the process head or heads from the transmitters meter body to clean
the process head cavity and inspect the barrier diaphragm or diaphragms. For flange mount and remote seal
diaphragms, you may only need to run a purge line in the tank to rinse off the face of the diaphragm.

Procedure
The procedure in Table 43 outlines the general steps for inspecting and cleaning barrier diaphragms. You
may have to modify the steps to meet your particular process or transmitter model requirements. Figure 42
shows an exploded view of a DP transmitters meter body for reference.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 127
10 Maintenance - Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms

Table 43 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms

Step Action

1 Close all valves and isolate transmitter from process. Open vent in process head to drain fluid
from transmitters meter body, if required.

ATTENTION

We recommend that you remove the transmitter from service and move it to a clean area
before taking it apart.

2 Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to meter body. Remove process
heads and bolts. See Figure 41.

3 Remove O-ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle brush and suitable solvent.

4 Inspect barrier diaphragm for any signs of deterioration or corrosion. Look for possible residue
and clean if necessary.
If diaphragm is dented, has distorted convolutions or radial wrinkles, performance may be
affected. Contact TAC for assistance.

5 Replace O-ring.

ATTENTION
We recommend that you install a new O-ring whenever a process head is removed for
cleaning.

The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with single-head design has two O-ring
grooves. A large one which is 2 inches (50.8 mm) in diameter and a small one which is 1.3
inches (33 mm) in diameter as shown in the following illustration. On high pressure model
STG180, GP transmitters, use the small O-ring in the smaller/inner groove. On other
models of GP and AP transmitters, use a large O-ring in the larger/outer groove. Never use
both O-rings together.

Larger O-ring Smaller O-ring


groove for groove for
lower pressure high pressure
applications applications

22518

Figure 41 GP/AP Process Head

128 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
10 Maintenance - Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms

For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual-head design, see illustration for
differential pressure transmitters in Figure 42.

6 Coat threads on process head bolts with anti-seize compound such as Neverseize or
equivalent.

7 Replace process head or heads and bolts. Finger tighten nuts.

8 Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown in Table 42, in sequence
shown in following illustration. Tighten head bolts in stages of 1/3 full torque, 2/3 full torque,
and then full torque.

Always tighten head bolts in


sequence shown and in these 1 3
stages:
1. 1/3 full torque
2. 2/3 full torque
3. Full torque 4 2

9 Return transmitter to service.

CAUTION

Do not exceed the overload rating when placing the transmitter back into service or during
cleaning operations. See Overpressure ratings in Section 3 of this manual.

Nuts

O-ring

Bolts

Process
head
O-ring

Center
section Process
head

Figure 42 Disassembly of DP Transmitter Process Heads from Meter Body

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 129
10 Maintenance - Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)

Torque ratings Table 44 lists process head bolt torque ratings for given transmitter type.

Table 44 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings

Bolt Type 7/16 x 14 UNC


51452557-001 5142557-002 and 003 51452557-004
Meterbody Type
(Carbon Steel - (NACE [CR option] and (B7M Alloy Steel
standard; no option Non-NACE [SS option] [B7 option])
specified) Stainless Steel)
51451864XXXX except 67,8 NM +/- 3,4 NM 56,9 NM +/- 2,8 NM 48,8 NM +/- 2,4 NM
XXX5
(All STD 3000 and SMV (50.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.5 Lb- (42.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.1 Lb-Ft) (36.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.8 Lb-Ft)
3000 Transmitters except Ft)
STD110)
51451864XXX5 20,3 NM +/- 1,0 NM 20,3 NM +/- 1,0 NM 20,3 NM +/- 1,0 NM
(Model STD110
Transmitter [draft range] (15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb- (15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft) (15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft)
only) Ft)

Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)


About the PWA Electronics Board
The circuitry in the ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters is of the single PWA design. The PWA contains
connectors for the flex-tape conductor from the sensor, the loop power wires and a connector for the
optional smart meter cable.
The procedure in Table 45 outlines the steps for replacing the PWA.

Table 45 Replacing PWA

Step Action

1 Turn OFF transmitter power.

ATTENTION

We recommend that you remove the transmitter from service and move it to a clean area
before taking it apart..

2 Loosen end cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side of transmitter housing.

ESD HAZARD

We recommend that you use a ground strap or ionizer when handling the PWA, since
electrostatic discharges can damage certain circuit components.

3 a) If equipped with a local smart meter, carefully turn smart meter counterclockwise to
remove it from PWA mounting bracket and unplug cable from connector on back of meter
assembly.

b) Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket and PWA from
housing.

130 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
10 Maintenance - Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)

Step Action

c) Using the retaining clip, unplug flex tape connector and 2-wire power connector from
PWA, and remove PWA.

4 If your transmitter:
has Local Smart Meter Option, then go to step 5.

does not have local smart meter option, then go to step 6.

5 Unplug meter cable from J4 connector on PWA, and remove cable from restraining clip. Plug
cable into J4 connector on replacement PWA. Route cable through slot and under restraining
clip.

6 Select the jumper location for the write protection desired (Read/Write Access or Read-Only
Access).

7 Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3, as applicable, to install PWA and bracket to transmitter
housing.
We recommend that you lubricate end-cap O-ring with silicon grease such as Dow Corning

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 131
10 Maintenance - Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)

Step Action
#33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.

8 Recalibrate transmitter. Refer to Section 10 for proper procedure.

ATTENTION

Be sure to orient local smart meter for proper viewing through end-cap window. You can rotate
the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments.

9 Return transmitter to service and turn ON power.

10 If applicable, verify local smart meter configuration data. Reconfigure selected engineering
units and lower and upper display range values as required. (See Appendix A for details.)

132 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
10 Maintenance - Replacing Meter Body

Replacing Meter Body


You can replace the complete meter body including process heads or only the meter body on selected DP,
GP and AP transmitters by using the existing process head(s).
Use the procedure in Table 46 to install a meter body only.

Table 46 Replacing Meter Body Only

Step Action

1 Complete first 3 Steps in Table 45, as applicable, to remove PWA.

2 Use 4 mm size hex wrench to completely loosen set screw outside housing.

Set Screw

Process Head Process Head


Meter Body

3 Carefully turn complete meter body counterclockwise to unscrew it from electronics housing.

4 Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to center section. Remove process
heads and bolts

5 Remove O-ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle brush and suitable solvent.

6 Replace O-ring.

ATTENTION

The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with single-head design has two O-ring
grooves. A large one which is 2 in (50.8 mm) in diameter and a small one which is 1.3 in (33
mm) in diameter as shown in the following illustration. On high-pressure, model STG180, GP
transmitters, be sure to use a small O-ring in the smaller/inner groove. On other models of GP
and AP transmitters, use a large O-ring in the larger/outer groove. Never use both O-rings
together.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 133
10 Maintenance - Replacing Meter Body

Step Action

6,
contd

Larger O-ring Smaller O-ring


groove for groove for
lower pressure high pressure
applications applications

22518

GP/AP Process Head


For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual-head design, see detail illustration for
differential pressure transmitters in Figure 42.

7 Coat threads on process head bolts with anti-seize compound such as Neverseize or
equivalent.

8 Carefully assemble process head or heads and bolts to new meter body. Finger tighten nuts.

Typical Series 100 DP Transmitter Meter Body

Nuts
Flex Tape
O-ring

O-ring

HP S
IDE
Bolts

Process LP S
ID E
head

Meter
Body

Process
head

134 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
10 Maintenance - Replacing Meter Body

Step Action

9 Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown in Table 44 in sequence
shown in following illustration. Tighten head bolts in stages of 1/3 full torque, 2/3 full torque,
and then full torque.

Always tighten head bolts in


sequence shown and in these
1 3
stages:
1. 1/3 full torque
2. 2/3 full torque
3. Full torque 4 2
22519

10 Feed flex tape on new meter body through neck of housing and screw new meter body into
housing until bottom of header portion of center section is approximately flush with neck of
electronics housing.

11 Tighten outside set screw to be sure it is fully seated in slot in header. Loosen set screw half
turn, rotate housing to desired position and tighten set screw.

12 Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3 in Table 45, as applicable, to return PWA and bracket to
transmitter housing.
We recommend that you lubricate end-cap O-ring with silicon grease such as Dow Corning
#33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.

13 Recalibrate transmitter. Refer to Section 10 for proper procedure.

ATTENTION

Be sure to orient Local Smart Meter for proper viewing through end-cap window. You can
rotate the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments.

14 Return transmitter to service and turn ON power

15 Verify transmitters configuration data. Restore saved database, if applicable.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 135
-

136 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
11 Calibration - Introduction

11 Calibration

Introduction
About this section
This section provides information about calibrating the transmitters analog output and measurement range.
It also covers the procedure for resetting calibration to default values as a quick alternative to measurement
range calibration.
This section includes these topics.
How to calibrate the transmitters analog output circuit using the communicator
How to perform a two-point calibration of the transmitter
How to perform a correct reset to return the transmitter calibration to its default values.

Overview
About calibration
The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter does not require recalibration at periodic intervals to maintain accuracy. If
a recalibration is required, we recommend that you do a bench calibration with the transmitter removed
from the process and located in a controlled environment to get the best accuracy.
Before you recalibrate the transmitters measurement range, you must calibrate the transmitters analog
output signal. See Table 47 for procedure.
You can also use the communicator to reset the calibration data to default values, if they are corrupted,
until the transmitter can be recalibrated. See Table 46 in this section for details.

ATTENTION

All procedures in this manual assume a transmitter poll address of 0 (zero). See page 74 for
information about poll address. HART 6 transmitters have a separate menu item for switching
to analog output mode.

Equipment Required

ATTENTION

Depending upon the calibration you choose, you may need any of the following test equipment
to accurately calibrate the transmitter:
Digital voltmeter or milliammeter with 0.02% accuracy or better

HART hand-held communicator

Calibration-standard pressure source with a 0.02% accuracy


250 ohm resistor with 0.01% accuracy or better.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 137
11 Calibration - Calibrating Analog Output Signal

Calibrating Analog Output Signal


You can calibrate the transmitters analog output circuit at its 0 and 100% levels by using the transmitter in
its constant-current source mode. It is not necessary to remove the transmitter from service.
The procedure in Table 47 shows the steps for calibrating the output signal for a transmitter in the analog
mode.

ATTENTION

You can calculate milliamperes of current from a voltage measurement by using the following
equation:
voltage
dc milliamps = 1000 x resistance

Table 47 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode

Step Action

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.


See Figure 30 in Section 7 for sample test equipment hookup.

ATTENTION
Be sure the accuracy of the resistor is 0.01% or better for current measurements made by
voltage drop.

2 Starting from Online menu, choose the following menu selections:


Device setup

Diag/Service

D/A trim

You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK.
When prompts appears, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter (0.03% accuracy or
better) in loop to check readings. Press OK.

3 The following display prompts will appear:


Setting field device output to 4mA. Press OK.

Enter meter value. Key in meter value, then press ENTER.

Field device output 4.000 mA equal to reference meter?


1 Yes
2 No
If not equal, select No, press ENTER, then key in new meter value. (Returns to Enter
meter value prompt until field device output equals reference meter.)
If equal, select Yes, press ENTER.
Go to Step 4.

138 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
11 Calibration - Calibrating Range

Step Action

4 The following display prompts will appear:


Setting field device output to 20mA. Press OK.

Enter meter value. Key in meter value, then press ENTER.

Field device output 20.000 mA equal to reference meter?


1 Yes
2 No
If not equal, select No, press ENTER, then key in new meter value. (Returns to Enter
meter value prompt until field device output equals reference meter.)
If equal, select Yes, press ENTER.
Prompt notifies you that the field device will be returned to its original output.

Calibrating Range
The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter has two-point calibration. This means when you calibrate two points in the
range, all the points in that range adjust to that calibration.
The procedure in Table 48 and Table 49 shows the steps for calibrating a differential pressure (DP) type
transmitter to a range of 0 to 200 inH2O for example purposes. This procedure assumes that the transmitter
is removed from the process and located in a controlled environment.

ATTENTION

You must have a precision pressure source with an accuracy of 0.02% or better to do a range
calibration. Note that we factory calibrate ST 3000 Smart Transmitters with inches of water
ranges using inches of water pressure referenced to a temperature of 39.2F (4C).

Table 48 Calibrating Measurement Range Correct LRV

Correct LRV

Step Action

1 Connect power supply and communicator to signal terminals on transmitters terminal block.
Connect precision pressure source to high pressure side of DP type transmitter.
See Figure 43 for typical communicator, power supply, and pressure source hookup for
calibration.

2 Turn on power supply and allow transmitter to stabilize its operation.

3 Turn on communicator.

4 From Online menu, choose the following menu selections:


Device setup

Diag/Service

Calibration

Correct Input LRV

You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 139
11 Calibration - Calibrating Range

Step Action

5 When prompted, adjust pressure source to apply pressure equal to LRV (0%), then press OK.

6 When pressure is stable, press OK. When prompted, remove pressure.

7* On the next prompt Please enter Calibration Date, enter the date in the format
MM/DD/YYYY (ex: 05/27/2009), then press Enter

8* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time in 24 Hr Clock format (Hour
field), enter the hour portion of the calibration time in the 24 Hr format HH (ex: 13), then press
Enter

9* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field), enter the Minutes
field MM (ex: 56), then press Enter

10* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time (Second field), enter the
Seconds field SS (ex: 56), then press Enter

11 When prompted, return loop to automatic control. Press Enter.

*HART 6 Advanced Diagnostics For ST 3000 Release only with the Universal Rev 6, Field Device Rev
5 and Software Rev 36.
For details about these parameters refer to Diagnostics/Service - Calibration Records under the
Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release topic.

Table 49 Calibrating Measurement Range Correct URV

Correct URV

Step Action

1 Connect power supply and communicator to signal terminals on transmitters terminal block.
Connect precision pressure source to high pressure side of DP type transmitter.
See Figure 43 for typical communicator, power supply, and pressure source hookup for
calibration.

2 Turn on power supply and allow transmitter to stabilize its operation.

3 Turn on communicator.

4 From Online menu, choose the following menu selections:


Device setup

Diag/Service

Calibration

Correct Input URV

You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK.

5 When prompted, adjust pressure source to apply pressure equal to URV (100%), then press
OK.

6 When pressure is stable, press OK. When prompted, remove pressure.

7* On the next prompt Please enter Calibration Date, enter the date in the format
MM/DD/YYYY (ex: 05/27/2009), then press Enter

8* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time in 24 Hr Clock format (Hour field),
enter the hour portion of the calibration time in the 24 Hr format HH (ex: 13), then press Enter

140 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
11 Calibration - Calibrating Range

Step Action

9* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field), enter the Minutes
field MM (ex: 56), then press Enter

10* On the next prompt Please enter current Calibration Time (Second field), enter the Seconds
field SS (ex: 56), then press Enter

11 When prompted, return loop to automatic control. Press Enter

*HART 6 Advanced Diagnostics For ST 3000 Release only with the Universal Rev 6, Field Device Rev
5 and Software Rev 36.
For details about these parameters refer to Diagnostics/Service - Calibration Records under the
Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release topic.

ST 3000 HART

+ 24Vdc

- SIGNAL +
Power
- Supply
-
TEST

250
+

Low
Pressure
Head
DVM
Dead Weight
Tester
or
Precision
Pressure Source

Communicator

NOTE: Polarity of communicator


connection does not matter.

Figure 43 Typical Range Calibration Hookup

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 141
11 Calibration - Resetting Calibration

Resetting Calibration
Background
Every ST 3000 transmitter is factory-characterized. The characterization process calculates a mathematical
model of the performance of the transmitters sensors and stores that data in the transmitters memory.
Small residual errors result from the sensor data acquisition and modeling process. These errors can be
eliminated through calibration, using either a zero offset or a span correction.
A Corrects Reset returns the zero and span calibration factors to their default values. The transmitter
calculates its output based on the characterization equation alone, without any compensation for the
residual errors.
A typical zero offset correction is less than 0.1 inches of water (based on a 400 inH2O range) and a typical
span correction is less than 0.2% regardless of the range of calibration (down to the point where
specification turndown begins). Typical performance of a 400 inH2O transmitter with Corrects Reset can
be expressed as:
Accuracy = 0.2% + (0.1/span) 100%
By calibrating the zero, the typical performance will be 0.2% or better.
For transmitter ranges other than 400, the initial zero offset will be scaled by the ratio of the Upper
Range Limit to 400. For example, for a 100 psi transmitter, the initial zero offset can be expressed by:
0.1 2768/400 = 0.7 or 0.025 psi.
Please note that these are typical values, not hard specifications.

Procedure
The procedure in Table 50 shows how to reset calibration data to default values in a transmitter using the
communicator.

Table 50 Resetting Calibration Data

Step Action

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.

2 From Online menu, choose the following menu selections:


Device setup

Diag/Service

Calibration

Reset Corrects

3 When prompted, remove the loop from automatic control. Press OK.
Prompt notifies you that a Reset Corrects is about to occur. Press OK.
When message Reset Corrects OK appears, press OK.
Previous calibration CORRECTS are removed and calibration is reset to default values.

4 When prompted, return the loop to automatic control and press OK.

142 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
- Introduction

12 - Diag/Service Advanced Diagnostics

Introduction
About this section
This section provides information about theAdvanced Diagnostics sub-menu under the Diag/Service Menu.
This information is only available for the HART 6 Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release with the
Universal Rev 6, Field Device Rev 5 and Software Rev 36.

Overview
About Advanced Diagnostics
The Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release ST 3000 Smart Transmitter provides the user with a
comprehensive set of advanced diagnostics information, which is accessible via the Advanced Diagnostics
sub-menu within the Diag/Service Menu. Use the following steps in Table 51 to view diagnostic
information:

Table 51 View Diagnostics

Step Action

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.


See Figure 30 in Section 7 for sample test equipment hookup.

2 Starting from Online menu, choose the following menu selections:


Device setup
Diag/Service
Advanced Diagnostics
Choose from the menu, any of the items below and follow screen prompts to view the
diagnostics
Install Date
Time In Service
% Service Life in Stress
Power Up Diagnosticss
ET Tracking Diagnostics
Operating Voltage
PV Tracking Diagnostics
MBT Tracking Diagnostics
% Service Life Used
SP Tracking Diagnostics

For details about the above diagnotics refer to Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics under the
Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release topic.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 143
12 - Diag/Service Advanced Diagnostics - Overview

144 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
13 Troubleshooting - Introduction

13 Troubleshooting

Introduction
About this section
This section identifies diagnostic messages that may appear in the communicator and describes what they
mean. An interpretation of diagnostic messages is given and suggestions of the possible cause and
corrective action for each message. Procedures are provided for running a status check.
This section includes these topics.
A summary of the different diagnostic message categories that can be displayed by the communicator.
A description of the diagnostic messages and a recommended action to correct the condition or fault.

Troubleshooting Overview
Diagnostics
The communicator and ST 3000 transmitter are constantly running internal diagnostics to monitor the
functions and status of the control loop and their communications link.
When a diagnostic failure is detected, a corresponding message is generated for the communicator display.
Troubleshooting tool
Your primary troubleshooting tool is using the communicator for status messages and then interpreting the
diagnostic messages. You should also use the communicator to verify the transmitters configuration data
and check to be sure that your process is operating correctly.

To access transmitter diagnostics


You access the transmitter diagnostics starting at the Online menu of the communicator.
You then select:
Device setup
Diag/Service
Device status
The Device status menu appears.
2
ST3000:PT 3011
Device status
1 Critical
2 Non-Critical
3 Info
4 Ext Dev Status

HELP SAVE HOME

For more details, refer to Table 52 - Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Info Status and - Diagnostic
Message Interpretation Table.
Select Critical or Non-Critical to view the status of the transmitters diagnostics. Device status
diagnostics are shown as either ON (in alarm) or OFF (no alarm).

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 145
13 Troubleshooting - Diagnostic Messages

Diagnostic Messages
Summary
The diagnostic messages can be grouped into one of these three categories:
Critical Failures
Non-Critical Failures
Information Status (Advanced Diagnostic Release for ST 3000 version only)
Communication Errors
A description of the messages in each category is given in the following paragraphs.

Critical failures
Table 52 summarizes the critical communicator status message displays. A critical failure drives the
transmitters output to its failsafe directionupscale or downscale.

Table 52 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures

Message Description
INVALID DATABASE Database corrupted upon power-up.
CHAR PROM FAULT Characterization PROM failure.
SUSPECT INPUT Input pressure may be incorrect
DAC DIODE FAULT Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) fault
NVM FAULT Transmitter Nonvolatile Memory (NVM) fault
RAM FAULT Transmitter Random Access Memory (RAM) fault
PROM FAULT Transmitter Programmable Read Only Memory
(PROM) fault
PAC FAULT * Operating System Flow Control Fault
FLOW CONTROL FAULT ** Operating System Flow Control Fault

* HART 5 only.
** HART 6 only.
Once a critical fault has been corrected, you must clear the critical status from the transmitter. See Clearing
Critical Status later in this section.

146 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
13 Troubleshooting - Diagnostic Messages

Non-critical failures
Table 53 summarizes the non-critical communicator status message displays. All communicator functions
remain operational during a non-critical failure.

Table 53 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non-Critical Failures

Message Description
SENSOR OVER TEMP Meter body temperature is too high.
EXCESS ZERO CORR Zero calibration value is too large (shift is larger
than characterization).
EXCESS SPAN CORR SPAN correction factor is outside the acceptable
limits for accurate operation.
IN OUTPUT MODE Transmitter is operating as current source.
M.B. OVERLOAD OR Input pressure is more than two times greater
than the Upper Range Limit of the transmitter.
METERBODY FAULT
CORRECTS RESET Must recalibrate transmitter to attain required
accuracy.
NO DAC TEMP COMP No temperature compensation data exists for
calculations

Table 54 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Info Status

(Supported only under Advanced Diagnostics Release for ST 3000)

Message Description
OP VOLTS<10 Voltage available at the connection terminals to
the device is less than 10 Volts.

Other error messages that may appear due to noncompatability of communicator software or transmitter
communication mode.

Table 55 Other Error Messages

Message Description
NOTICE: Upgrade 275 software to access new You have connected to a device that has a newer
Xmtr functions. Continue with old description? revision of device description than what is in the
communicator.
In multidrop mode The transmitter poll address is not 0 (zero). You
have tried to change the analog output of a
transmitter that is in multidrop mode.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 147
13 Troubleshooting - Diagnostic Messages

Communication errors
Table 56 summarizes the message displays associated with communication errors. All communicator
functions are disabled when a communication error occurs.

Table 56 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors

Message Description
Device Disconnected Communication with a device has been
interrupted.

No Device Found Communicator was unable to establish


communications with any device upon power-up.

148 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
13 Troubleshooting - Interpreting Messages

Interpreting Messages
Most of the diagnostic messages that can be displayed on the communicator are listed in alphabetical order
in Table 57 along with a description and suggested action to be taken.

Table 57 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table

Message Possible Cause What to Do

Char PROM Fault Characterization PROM is not Replace meter body.


functioning correctly.

Corrects Reset All calibration CORRECTS Recalibrate transmitter.


were deleted and data was reset See Section 10.
to default values.

DAC Diode Fault Digital to Analog Converter Replace electronics module (PWA).
(DAC) fault.

Device Disconnected Previously established Try communicating again.


communication with a transmitter
has been lost. Could be a Check that transmitters loop integrity
transmitter or loop failure. has been maintained, that
communicator is connected
properly, and that loop resistance
is at least 250.

Electronic Fault Electronics module is not Replace electronics module. Do not


functioning properly. SAVE data.

Excess Span Corr SPAN correction factor is outside Check input pressure and be sure
acceptable limits. Could be that that it matches calibrated range
transmitter was in output mode. value.
Check meter body.

Do a URV CORRECT procedure.

Excess Zero Corr ZERO correction factor is outside Check input pressure and be sure
acceptable limits. Could be that that it matches calibrated range
INPUT was incorrect or value.
transmitter was in output mode
during a CORRECT procedure. Check meter body.

Do an LRV CORRECT procedure.

The transmitter poll address is


In multidrop mode HART 5: Change HART mode of
not 0 (zero). You have tried to transmitter to analog by changing poll
change the analog output of a address to 0.
transmitter that is in multidrop

mode. HART 6: Enable Loop Current Mode

In Output Mode Transmitter is operating as a Exit output mode (Loop test)-. Perform
current source. Master reset, (or cycle power).

Table continued on next page

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 149
13 Troubleshooting - Interpreting Messages

Message Possible Cause What to Do


Invalid Database Transmitter database was Try communicating again.
incorrect at power-up.
Verify database configuration,
Manually update non-volatile
memory with each parameter.
M.B. Overload Pressure input is two times Check range and, if required, replace
greater than URL of transmitter. transmitter with one that has a
OR wider range.
Meterbody Fault Meter body may have been
damaged. Check the transmitter
for accuracy and linearity. Replace
meter body and recalibrate, if
needed.
No DAC Temp Comp No temperature compensation Effect will be minor degradation of
data exists for calculations. ambient temperature influence
specifications. Replace electronics
module (PWA).
No Device Found No response from transmitter. Try communicating again.
Could be transmitter or loop
failure. Check that transmitters loop integrity
has been maintained, that
communicator is connected
properly, and that loop resistance
is at least 250.
NOTICE: Upgrade 275/375 You have connected to a device Get updated device description for the
software to access new Xmtr that has a newer revision of transmitter installed in the
functions. Continue with old device description than what is in communicator.
description? the communicator.
Note: You can continue
communicating with the transmitter, but
will not have access to full transmitter
functions.
NVM Fault Transmitters nonvolatile memory Replace electronics module (PWA).
fault.
HART5: PAC Fault Operating System Flow Control Replace electronics module (PWA)

Fault
HART 6: Flow Control Fault
HART5: N/A Voltage available at the Check power supply and check that

connection terminals to the transmitters loop integrity has been
HART 6 (Advanced device is less than 10 Volts. maintained and that loop resistance is
Diagnostics for ST 3000 at least 250.
Release): Operating Voltage
Less Than 10V
PROM Fault Transmitter Programmable Read Replace electronics module (PWA).
Only Memory (PROM) fault
RAM Fault Transmitter Random Access Replace electronics module (PWA).
Memory (RAM) fault.
Sensor Over Temp Meter body temperature is too Take steps to insulate meter body from
high. Accuracy and life span may temperature source.
decrease if it remains high.
Suspect Input Input data seems wrong. Could Put transmitter in output mode.
be a process problem, but it Diagnostic messages should
could also be a meter body or identify where problem is. If no
PWA problem. other diagnostic message is given,
condition is most likely meter body
related.
Check installation and replace meter
body if condition persists.

150 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
13 Troubleshooting - Clearing Critical Status

Clearing Critical Status


After a critical failure has been diagnosed and corrected the critical status must be cleared from the
transmitter. This can be done by performing a master reset using the communicator.
A master reset causes a hardware reset of the transmitter, which actually is the same as cycling the power to
the transmitter.
Table 58 outlines the steps for resetting the transmitter.

Table 58 Resetting the Transmitter

Step Action

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.

2 From Online menu, choose the following menu selections:


Device setup

Diag/Service

Master reset

3 When prompted, remove the loop from automatic control. Press OK.
Prompt notifies you that a Master Reset is about to occur. Press OK.
When message Master reset OK appears, press OK.
Previous calibration CORRECTS are removed and calibration is reset to default values.

4 When prompted, return the loop to automatic control and press OK.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 151
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

14 Parts List

Replacement Parts
About this section
All individually saleable parts for the various transmitter models are listed in this section. Some parts are
illustrated for identification. Parts are identified and listed in the corresponding tables as follows:
All individually saleable parts are indicated in each figure by key number callout. For example: 1, 2, 3, and
so on.
All parts that are supplied in kits are indicated in each figure by key number callout with the letter K
prefix. For example: K1, K2, K3, and so on.
Parts denoted with a are recommended spares. See Table 70 for summary list of recommended spare
parts.
Figure 40 shows major parts for a given model with reference to parts list figures.

152 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Figure 44 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 153
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

1 Angle 2
Mounting
Bracket

3 Flat 4
Mounting
Bracket

Figure 45 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.

Table 59 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.

Key Part Number Description Quantity


No. Per Unit
1 30752770-003 Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush mount

2 30752770-004 Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for models LGP, Flush mount, STR14G,
STR17G, and STR94G
3 51196557-001 Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush Mount

4 51196557-002 Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models LGP, Flush mount, STR14G,
STR17G, and STR94G

154 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Figure 46 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Electronics/Meter End.

1 K1 3/K2

Figure 47 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Terminal Block End

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 155
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Table 60 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 42 and Figure 43

Key Part Number Description Quantity


No. Per Unit
1 30756961-503 End Cap 1
2 30756996-503 End Cap, meter 1
3 51205897-501 Terminal assembly without lightning protection 1
51404078-502 Terminal assembly with lightning protection
4 51309389-501 Local Zero and Span Adjust Only 1
51309389-502 Local Smart Meter Only
51309389-503 Local Smart Meter With Zero and Span Adjust
5 51309397-505 HART 6 Electronics Module Assembly (PWA) 1
51309397-515 NAMUR Compliant HART 6 Electronics Module Assembly
6 51204038-001 Retaining Clip 1
7 30756997-501 Analog meter 1
K1 30757503-002 Electronics housing seals kit (includes O-rings)
K2 51197425-001 Terminal assembly without lightning protection conversion kit (includes
screws, cover, and terminal block)
51197425-002 Terminal assembly with lightning protection conversion kit (includes
screws, cover, and terminal block)
Not 30757504-001 Electronics housing hardware kit, DP/I, GP/I, LGP/I (includes screws,
Shown gasket, plate, washers, cover terminal, and spacers)

156 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Figure 48 ST 3000 Model STD110, STD120, STD125, STD130, STD170, STD904, STD924,
STD930, STD974, STG944, STG974 (Rev S or greater)

Table 61 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 44 and Figure 45.

Key Part Number Description Qty/


No. Unit
1 Specify complete Series 100 Meter Body replacement kit includes: 1
model number from
nameplate plus R300 Meter body (without Process Heads)
Neoprene O-ring, Meter Body to Electronica Housing (K7; Part no.
30752785-007; 1/unit)
Process Head Gasket; PTFE (K6; Part No. 51452560-002; 2/unit)

Specify complete Series 900 Meter Body replacement kit includes: 1


model number from
nameplate plus R300 Meter body (without Process Heads)
Neoprene O-ring, Meter Body to Electronica Housing (K7; Part no.
30752785-007; 1/unit)
Process Head Gasket; PTFE (K6; Part No. 51452560-002; 2/unit)

Bolting Kits:

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 157
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Key Part Number Description Qty/


No. Unit
51452866-001 Bolts and Nuts Kit, Carbon Steel
51452866-002 Bolts A286 SS (NACE) and Nuts, 304 SS (NACE) Kit
51452866-003 Bolts, 316 SS (non-NACE) and Nuts, 316 SS (non-NACE) Kit
51452866-004 Bolts B7M and Nuts 7M Kit
Each Bolts and Nuts Kit includes:
Kc Bolt, Hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.50 Inches long (Flange Adapter) 4
K4 Nut, Hex, 7/16 UNC (Process Head) 4
K8 Bolt, Hex Head, 7/16 UNC X 3.25 inches long (Process Head) 4

Vent and Plug Kits:

30753785-001 Drain and Plug Kit, stainless steel


30753787-001 Drain and Plug Kit, Monel
30753786-001 Drain and Plug Kit, Hastelloy C
Each Drain and Plug Kit includes:
K1 Pipe Plug 4
K2 Vent Plug 2
K3 Vent Bushing 2

Meterbody Gasket Kits:

51452865-001 Meterbody Gasket Kit (PTFE Material); Kit includes:


51452865-002 Meterbody Gasket Kit (Viton Material); Kit includes:
K6 Gasket, Process Head 6
Ka Gasket, Flange Adapter 6
K7 O-Ring, Meterbody to Electronics Housing 3
Process Head Gasket Kits:

K6 51452868-001 Gasket only, Process Head (12 PTFE Gaskets/pack) 12


K6 51452868-002 Gasket only, Process Head (6 Viton Head O-Rings) 6
K6 51452868-007 Gasket only, Process Head Graphite Gasket (use only as replacement 6
of existing graphite gasket)

158 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Key Part Number Description Qty/


No. Unit
Flange Adapter Gasket Kits:

Ka 51452868-004 Gasket only, Flange Adapter, 6 PTFE Adapter Gaskets 6


Ka 51452868-005 Gasket only, Flange Adapter, 6 VITON Adapter O-Rings 6
Ka 51452868-0078 Gasket only, Flange Adapter Graphite Gasket (use only as 6
replacement of existing graphite gasket)
inch NPT Flange Adapter Kits:

Flange Adapter Kit, with:


51452867-110 SS Flange Adapters and with carbon steel bolts
51452867-210 SS Flange Adapters and with A286 SS (NACE) bolts
51452867-310 SS Flange Adapters and with 316 SS (non-NACE) bolts
51452867-410 SS Flange Adapters and with B7M alloy steel bolts

51452867-550 Monel Flange Adapters and with carbon steel bolts


51452867-350 Monel Flange Adapters and with 316 SS (non-NACE) bolts

51452867-130 Hastelloy C Flange Adapters and with carbon steel bolts


51452867-330 Hastelloy C Flange Adapters and with 316 SS (non-NACE) bolts

Each 1/2-inch NPT Flange Adapter Kit includes:


Ka Gasket, Flange Adapter 2
Kb 1/2-inch NPT Flange Adapter 2
Kc Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.50 inches long, Flange Adapter 4

Blind Flange Adapter Kits:

51452867-100 SS Blind Flange Adapter Kit, with Carbon Steel bolts


51452867-200 SS Blind Flange Adapter Kit, with A286 SS (NACE) bolts
51452867-300 SS Blind Flange Adapter Kit, with 316 SS (non-NACE) bolts
51452867-400 SS Blind Flange Adapters and B7M alloy steel bolts

Each Blind Flange Adapter Kit includes:


Ka Gasket, Flange Adapter 2
Kb Blind Flange Adapter 2
Kc Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.50 inches long, Flange Adapter 4

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 159
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Figure 49 ST 3000 Model STG944, STG974 (Rev S or greater)

Table 62 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 44 and Figure 45

Key Part Number Description Quantity


No Per Unit
Process Head Kits:
Process Head Assembly Kit, with PTFE Gasket and with:
51452864-010 Carbon steel head (zinc plated) without side vent/drain
51452864-012 Carbon steel head (zinc plated) with side vent/drain

51452864-020 Stainless steel head without side vent/drain


51452864-022 Stainless steel head with side vent/drain

51452864-030 Hastelloy C head without side vent/drain


51452864-032 Hastelloy C head with side vent/drain

51452864-040 Monel head without side vent/drain


51452864-042 Monel head with side vent/drain

51452864-050 Carbon steel head (nickel plated) without side vent/drain


51452864-052 Carbon steel head (nickel plated) with side vent/drain

160 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Key Part Number Description Quantity


No Per Unit

Process Head Assembly Kit, with VITON Gasket and with:


51452864-110 Carbon steel head (zinc plated) without side vent/drain
51452864-112 Carbon steel head (zinc plated) with side vent/drain

51452864-120 Stainless steel head without side vent/drain


51452864-122 Stainless steel head with side vent/drain

51452864-130 Hastelloy C head without side vent/drain


51452864-132 Hastelloy C head with side vent/drain

51452864-140 Monel head without side vent/drain


51452864-142 Monel head with side vent/drain

51452864-150 Carbon steel head (nickel plated) without side vent/drain


51452864-152 Carbon steel head (nickel plated) with side vent/drain

Each Process head Assembly Kit includes: 2


K1 Pipe Plug (See Note 1, 2.) 1
K2 Vent Plug (See Note 1.) 1
K3 Vent Bushing (See Note 1.) 1
K5 Process Head 1
K6 Gasket (PTFE), Process Head 1
Ka Gasket (PTFE), Flange Adapter
NOTE 1 : This item is made of the same material as the
Process Heads, except for Kits with carbon steel Process
Heads, which include stainless steel Pipe Plug, Vent Plug,
and Vent Bushing.
NOTE 2: The Kit for Process Heads without side vent/drain
does not include Pipe Plugs (K1).
Reference Head:
K9 51452951-001 Carbon Steel Blind Reference Head 1
K9 51452951-002 316 SS Blind Reference Head (Model Selection Guide HR Option) 1

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 161
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

K2

K4

2
K3
1

K1

Figure 50 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body

Table 63 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 46.

Key No. Part Number Description Quantity


Per Unit
2 See Table 64 Process head (GP/AP models) 1
1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body without head (GP/AP Models) 1
model number from
nameplate plus
R300
Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without head (GP/AP Models) 1
model number from
nameplate plus
R300
30754154-002 Head gasket kit for all models with narrow profile meter body except
STG180 (3 sets)
30754154-003 Head gasket kit for model STG180 with narrow profile meter body (3
sets)
K2 O-ring 3
K3 Gasket, Teflon [for gasket only - 30756445-502 (narrow profile L.P), 6
or 30756445-503 (STG180)
Gasket, Viton [for gasket only - 30756445-504 (narrow profile L.P), 6
or 30756445-505 (STG180)

162 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Key No. Part Number Description Quantity


Per Unit
30753792-001 Bolts & nuts kit, all models - narrow profile (carbon steel)
K1 Nut, hex, metric, M8 carbon steel 4
K4 Bolt, hex head, metric, M8, 50 mm long 4
30753793-002 A286 SS (NACE) Bolts & 304 SS (NACE) nuts kit, all models -
narrow profile
K1 Nut, hex, 5/16 (304 stainless steel) 4
K4 Bolt, hex head, 5/16-18 4
30753793-003 Process Head Bolting 316 SS Non-NACE
Kit Includes: Process Head Bolts and Nuts. Contains:
K1 5/16 18 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE Heavy Hex Nuts 4
K4 5/16 18 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE Hex Cap Screw 4

Table 64 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for


Narrow Profile Meter Body

Material Fitting Size Models: STA122, STA140,


STG140, STG170, STG180,
STA922, STA940
Carbon steel (Series 100) 9/16 - 18UNF-2B 30755124-001
Stainless steel (Series 100) 9/16 - 18UNF-2B 30755124-002
Carbon steel 1/2 in NPT 30755124-005
Stainless steel 1/2 in NPT 30755124-006
Monel 1/2 in NPT 30755124-008
Hastelloy C 1/2 in NPT 30755124-007

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 163
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

K1
K2
K3

K2

K1

Figure 51 Series 900 Dual-Head GP Meter Bodies.

Table 65 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 47.

Key Part Number Description Quantity


No. Per Unit
1 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without heads (GP models) 1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
K1 30757506-001 Head bolts carbon steel, 3/8-inch 4
Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts
30757507-001 Head bolts stainless steel/NACE, 3/8-inch 4
Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts
30757507-002 Process Head Bolting 3/8 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE 4
Kit Includes: Process Head Bolts and Nuts
K2 30757501-001 Replacement heads carbon steel
Kit includes: Head with side vents, Head dummy CS, Head gaskets
Teflon, Head gaskets Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent Plug, Gasket
30757501-002 Replacement heads carbon steel
Kit includes: Head without side vents, Head dummy CS, Head gaskets
Teflon, Head gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent Plug, Gasket
30757502-001 Replacement heads stainless steel
Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head dummy SS, Head gaskets
Teflon, head gaskets Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
30757502-002 Replacement heads stainless steel
Kit includes: Heads without side vents, Head dummy SS, Head gaskets
Teflon, head gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
30756941-005 Stainless steel blind reference head (HR option)

164 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Key Part Number Description Quantity


No. Per Unit
K3 30757505-001 Process head gasket kit
Kit includes: 6 Teflon head gaskets (30757100-001), 6 Teflon flange
adapter gaskets (30679622-001), 6 Viton head gaskets (30749274-004)
Optional Flange Adapter - Not Shown
K4 30679622-501 Flange adapter gaskets Teflon 6
30749274-502 Flange adapter gaskets Viton 6

Round Body Hexagonal Body

Figure 52 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP/LAP Meter Body.

Table 66 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 48.

Key Part Number Description Quantity


No. Per Unit
1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body (LGP model) 1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body (LGP model) 1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 165
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Figure 53 Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body.

Table 67 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 49.

Key Part Number Description Quantity


No. Per Unit
1 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body (Flush Mount model) 1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
30756445-508 Gasket Kit (0-rings)
51204496-001 316L SS Mounting Sleeve Kit
51204497-001 Calibration Sleeve Kit

166 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Extended Flange Design

Pseudo Flange Design

Figure 54 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 167
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Table 68 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 50.

Key Part Number Description Quantity


No. Per Unit
1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body 1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body 1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300

30749372-005 O-ring seal 1


30749372-001 O-ring seal 1

Optional Flange Adapter - Not Shown


30754419-006 Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-008 Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-022 Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapter with 316 st. steel bolts)
30754419-024 Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapter with 316 st. steel bolts)
K1 Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg. 2
K2 Flange adapter 1
K3 Gasket 1
K4 Filter screen 1
30754419-007 Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-023 Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapter with 316 st. steel bolts)
K1 Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg. 2
K2 Flange adapter 1
K3 Gasket 1
K5 30757503-002 Housing seal kit 1

168 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

1 1

Sanitary Seal Small Flange NPT

Figure 55 High Temperature Meter Body.

Table 69 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 51.

Key Part Number Description Quantity


No. Per Unit
1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body 1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300

Sanitary Seal Head and Gasket


51204982-001 Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Stainless Steel Head w/ st.stl. hardware)
51204982-003 Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Stainless Steel Head w/ SS NACE. hardware)
51204982-002 Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Hastelloy Head w/ st.stl. hardware)
51204984-001 Gasket GP/I (includes Teflon gasket and Viton O-ring)

Flange Adapter - Not Shown


51204983-001 Flange adapter kit ( NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-002 Flange adapter kit ( NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-017 Flange adapter kit ( NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-018 Flange adapter kit ( NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-003 Flange adapter kit ( NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-004 Flange adapter kit ( NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-005 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-006 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-019 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-020 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-007 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 169
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Key Part Number Description Quantity


No. Per Unit
51204983-008 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-013 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-014 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-023 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-024 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-015 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-016 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-009 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-010 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-021 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-022 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-011 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-012 Flange adapter kit (1 NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-025 Flange adapter kit (2 st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-026 Flange adapter kit (2 st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-037 Flange adapter kit (2 st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-038 Flange adapter kit (2 st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-027 Flange adapter kit (2 Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-028 Flange adapter kit (2 Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-029 Flange adapter kit (1 st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-030 Flange adapter kit (1 st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-039 Flange adapter kit (1 st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-040 Flange adapter kit (1 st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)

51204983-031 Flange adapter kit (1 Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)


51204983-032 Flange adapter kit (1 Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-033 Flange adapter kit (2 st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-034 Flange adapter kit (2 st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-041 Flange adapter kit (2 st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-042 Flange adapter kit (2 st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-035 Flange adapter kit (2 Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-036 Flange adapter kit (2 Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)

170 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
14 Parts List - Replacement Parts

Table 70 Summary of Recommended Spare Parts.

Reference Spares for


Part Number Description Figure Key 1-10 10- 100-
Nmbr. Nmbr. Units 100 1000
Units Units

Electronics Housing Assembly Figs 42 and 43

51309397-505 42 5 1 1-2 2-4


Electronics Module Assembly (HART 6)

30757503-002 Series 100/900 housing seal kit 42, 43 K1 1 1-2 2-4

51205897-501 Series 100/900 terminal assembly without lightning 43 3/K2 1 1 1-2


protection

51404078-502 Series 100/900 terminal assembly with lightning


protection

Process head gasket kit 1 1-4 4-10

For STD924-A, B, E, F, and J; STD930-A, B, E, F, 45, 47 K3


and J; STG944; STG974 models
30757505-001 Teflon and Viton
For all other Series 100 DP and STD924-C, D, G, H, 44 K7
K, and L; STD930-C, D, G, H, K, and L; and STD974
models
30753788-003 Teflon
30753788-004 Viton
For STA122, STA140, STA922, STA940, STG140, 46 K1
and STG170
30754154-002 Teflon and Viton
30754154-003 For STG180 46 K3

Meter Body 1 1-2 2-4

Specify Series 100/900 DP Models 44 1


complete model Series 900 DP Models 44, 45 1
number from Series 100/900 GP/AP Models 46 1
nameplate plus Series 900 GP Dual Head Model 47 1
R300 Series 100/900 LGP/LAP and Series 900 AP Models 48 1
Series 900 Flush Mount Models 49 1
Series 100/900 Flange Mount Models 50 1
Series 100 High Temperature Models 51 1

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 171
- Replacement Parts

172 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
14 Reference Drawings - Wiring Diagrams

14 Reference Drawings

Wiring Diagrams
Contents
These wiring diagrams are included in numerical order behind this section for wiring reference.

External Wiring Diagrams


Table 71 External Wiring Diagrams

ST 3000 HART Description Drawing number

Release 300 For intrinsically safe application (FM) 51205784

Series 100, 900 For intrinsically safe application (CENELEC) 51204215

Transmitters For intrinsically safe application (CSA) 51450806

Dimension Drawings
Dimension drawings for individual transmitter models are available and are listed in this manual. If you
need a copy of a drawing, please determine the appropriate drawing number and contact your Honeywell
representative to obtain a copy.

5/08 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 173


14 Reference Drawings - Wiring Diagrams

174 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Introduction

Appendix A Smart Meter Reference

Introduction
About this section
This section describes the integral smart meter options available with the ST 3000 Release 300
HARTtransmitter.
Procedures are given for setting range values of the transmitter using the smart meter pushbuttons.

You can use the meter pushbuttons or the HART communicator to set up the smart meter display to
indicate transmitter PV output.
Typical smart meter indications are given as well as examples and descriptions of possible error codes
displayed on the smart meter.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 175
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Introduction

Smart meter option


Depending upon your transmitter model, you can equip the ST 3000 transmitter with the Smart Meter
option (option SM). This new integral smart meter is designed for ST 3000 Release 300 Transmitters and
provides functionality not available with other smart meter designs.
The smart meter provides an LCD local interface that displays both analog and digital indications of the
transmitter output and can be configured to display pressure in user-selected engineering units.
There are three meter option types:
Meter option Description
Smart Meter with local Zero and Span
Adjustments Features smart meter LCD
interface, pushbuttons for setting engineering
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
units and lower range/upper range values, and
zero/span adjustments.
0 % 100
SPAN UNITS

SET

ZERO LOWER
VALUE

Local Zero and Span Adjustments only


Provides pushbuttons to make zero and span
adjustments.

SPAN

ZERO

Smart Meter only Features smart meter LCD


interface, pushbuttons for setting engineering
units and lower range/upper range values.
VAR UPPER
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100
UNITS

SET

LOWER
VALUE

Note: The Model STD110 does not support local zero and span adjustments.

Smart Meter Set up


The smart meter can be set up to display pressure in a number of user-selected engineering units or even
custom units, if required. The meter display set up is part of the transmitter configuration database and can
be performed when configuring the transmitter. You can use either the HART communicator or the
pushbuttons on the front of the meter to set up the smart meter display. The procedures for either method
of meter set up are provided in this appendix.

176 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Smart Meter Display

Smart Meter Display


Display description
Figure A-1 shows a smart meter display with all its indicators and segments lit for reference. Descriptions
of the meter indicators are listed in Table A-1. Table A-2 shows the smart meter with the pushbuttons
highlighted and a brief description of each pushbutton. The pushbuttons are used for setting up the smart
meter display and making zero and span adjustments.

17-Segment Bargraph
(0 to 100%)

VAR UPPER
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100
UNITS
SPAN

-18 8. 80
oF oC
% SET
Digital Readout FLOW
(-19990 to +19990)
OUTPUT MODE ANALOG In H O
ZERO 2 LOWER
CHECK STATUS
GPH mmHg VALUE Engineering Unit
KNOWN VALUE K GPM PSI A Indicators

Status Indicators K Multiplier -


Indicates digital readout
is multiplied by 1,000

Figure A-1 Smart Meter Display with All Indicators Lit.

Table A-1 Description of Smart Meter Display Indicators

Display Indicator What It Means When Lit

17-Segment Bargraph Gives a gross indication of the transmitters PV output from 0 to 100%.

Digital Readout Gives an indication of the transmitters PV output in either percent of


span or actual engineering units. The display range is 19,990,000 and
it is automatically ranged to provide the best precision possible within
the limits of the display. A second decimal place expands the precision
of range values within 19.99 to 1/100th of a unit.

% Digital readout represents output in percent of span. This is the default


engineering units selection.

FLOW Transmitter is configured for square root output conformity.

OUTPUT MODE Transmitter is in its output mode and it is not sending a real PV signal.

CHECK STATUS Transmitter in multidrop mode and showing a critical status or if


transmitter is in Analog mode, the transmitter has an output that is less
than 2.0% or greater than 106%.
Use the communicator to check transmitters status.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 177
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference -

Display Indicator What It Means When Lit

KNOWN VALUE The upper value or lower value being displayed has previously been
configured to the value shown.

ANALOG Transmitter is in its analog mode. (When indicator is OFF, transmitter is


in multidrop mode)

K Multiplies digital reading by 1,000. Turns on automatically when reading


exceeds 1999.

A Transmitter is absolute pressure type. Digital readout represents


absolute values.

Engineering Units Indicators

inH2O Inches of Water


GPH Gallons per hour
GPM Gallons per minute
MmHg Millimeters of Mercury
PSI Pounds per Square Inch

Additional Engineering Units Selectable engineering units - Available as a stick-on label from
(stick-on label not shown) Honeywell drawing number 30756918-001.
Kpa = Kilopascals
Mpa = Megapascals
mbar = Millibar
bar = Bar
g/cm2 = Grams per Square Centimeter
Kg/cm2 = Kilograms per Square Centimeter
mmH2O = Millimeters of Water
inHg = Inches of Mercury
mH2O = Meters of Water

Table A-2 Smart Pushbutton Description

Smart Meter Pushbuttons Pushbutton Function

VAR SEL. Not functional when installed with


ST 3000 transmitters.

SPAN Selects Span range setting (URV).


VAR UPPER
SEL. VALUE ZERO Selects Zero range setting.

UPPER VALUE Selects upper display limit for custom or


SPAN UNITS flow engineering units.

-18 8. 8 0
oF oC
% SET UNITS SET Selects engineering units for meter
FLOW
display.
OUTPUT MODE ANALOG In H O LOWER
ZERO CHECK STATUS 2
VALUE LOWER VALUE Selects Lower display limit for custom or
KNOWN VALUE K GPH mmHg
GPM PSI A flow engineering units.

Decrease pushbutton

Increase pushbutton

178 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Smart Meter Specifications

Smart Meter Specifications


Operating conditions and specifications
Before installing a transmitter equipped with a smart meter or installing the smart meter in an existing
transmitter, please note the specifications and operating limits of the meter in Table A-3.

Table A-3 Smart meter specifications.

Operating Conditions

Parameter Rated Extreme, Transportation and


Storage

Ambient Temperature F 40 to 176 58 to 194


C 40 to 80 50 to 90

Relative Humidity %RH 10 to 90 0 to 100


Design

Accuracy No error. Reproduces transmitter signal exactly within its resolution.

Display Resolution Bargraph 3% of reading Shown as:

Digital Readout 0.005 for 19.99 reading range, 19.99


0.05 for 199.9 reading range, 199.9
0.5 for 1999 reading range, 1999
5 for 19990 reading range, 19.99 K
50 for 199900 reading range, 199.9 K
1999 K
500 for 1999000 reading range,
19990 K
5000 for 19990000 reading range.

Display Update Rate Above 32F (0C): second


@ or below 32F (0C): 1 seconds

Meter Display at High and Low Temperature Extremes


The rated temperature limits for the local meter are listed above and are true in that no damage to the meter
will occur over these temperatures, however the readability of the LCD is affected if taken to these
temperature extremes:

The LCD will turn black at some temperature between 80 to 90 C (176 and 194 F), rendering the
display unreadable. This effect is only temporary, and normally occurs at 90 C (194 F).

At low temperatures, the update rate of the display is lengthened to 1.5 seconds due to the slower
response time of the display. At -20 C (-4 F) the display becomes unreadable due to slow response
of the LCD. This is also only temporary and normal readability will return when temperature returns
above -20 C (-4 F).

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 179
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span)

Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span)


Local zero and span option
ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters are available with optional local zero and span adjustments. This option
is for applications that do not require a HART communicator nor digital integration with our TPS system.

About local adjustments


You must apply equivalent zero and span pressures to make the local zero and span adjustments. This is
similar to LRV correct and URV set using the HART communicator. We recommend that you calibrate
the transmitter before setting up the meter for custom engineering units.
The procedure in Table A-4 shows the steps for setting the range values to applied pressures using local
zero and span adjustments. See Figure A-2 for typical local adjustment setup details.

ATTENTION

All procedures in this manual assume a transmitter poll address of 0 (zero). See Section 6, for
information about poll address.

After making any adjustments to the smart meter, keep the transmitter powered for at least 30
seconds so that the new meter configuration is written to non-volatile memory. If power is
turned off before 30 seconds, the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter
power is restored, the meter configuration will revert to the previous settings.

Table A-4 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments

Step Action

1 Turn OFF transmitter power. Loosen end-cap lock and remove end-cap from terminal block
side of electronics housing.

2 Observing polarity, connect a milliammeter across positive (+) and negative () TEST terminals.

ATTENTION

If you have the smart meter with local zero and span adjustment option, you may use the
smart meter in place of the milliammeter.

3 Loosen end-cap lock and remove end-cap from PWA side of electronics housing to expose
local zero and span assembly or smart meter with zero and span adjustments.
Examples Local zero and span assembly, and Smart meter with zero and span adjustments.

VAR UPPE R
SEL. VALUE

SP AN
0 % 100
SP AN UNITS

SE T

ZERO ZERO LOWER


VALUE

and

180 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span)

Step Action

4 Turn ON transmitter power and let it warm up for a few minutes. Using an accurate pressure
source, apply desired zero equivalent pressure to transmitter.

ATTENTION

For differential pressure transmitters, apply pressure to the high pressure head for positive
range values or vent both heads to atmosphere for zero. If zero is to equal a negative value,
apply the equivalent pressure to the low pressure head. For example, if zero is to equal 10
inH2O, you would apply 10 inH2O to the low pressure head and vent the high pressure head
for the zero adjustment.

5 Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA.


If reading is less or greater than 4 mA, Then go to Step 6.

If reading is correct, go to Step 7.

ATTENTION

If you have the smart meter with local zero and span adjustment option, you may substitute
the smart meter readings for the milliammeter readings. For example, with zero input pressure
applied assume that the meter reads 4 inH2O instead of 0 inH2O. In this case, the meter
reading is greater than 0 (or 4 mA).

6 d) Press and hold ZERO button on local zero and span assembly or smart meter.

ATTENTION

The smart meter readings revert to the default unit of percent (%) during this operation. If the
error code Er0 appears on the display, you are working with a model STD110 transmitter that
does not support the local zero and span adjustments.

e) Press Decrease button once to complete this function.


The smart meter display goes blank for a 1/2 second and then returns reading 0%.

f) Check that milliammeter reading equals 4 mA and release ZERO button.

ATTENTION

If milliammeter reading doesnt change, be sure you are not working with a model STD110
transmitter that ignores local adjustments. The smart meter readings return to the set
engineering units after you release the ZERO button.

If zero correction is + or 5% of upper range limit, the CHECK STATUS indicator will be
displayed. If range setting is intentional, disregard status message.

7 Using an accurate pressure source, apply pressure equivalent to desired upper range value to
transmitter.

ATTENTION

For differential pressure transmitters, apply pressure to the high pressure head and be sure
that the low pressure side is vented to atmosphere.

If the applied pressure produces an output of greater than 200%, the meter display will flash
O-L and the 200% value during this interim step.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 181
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span)

Step Action

8 Check that milliammeter reading is 20 mA.


If reading is not exactly 20 mA, Then go to Step 9.

If reading is correct, go to Step 10.

ATTENTION

If you have the smart meter with local zero and span adjustment option, you may substitute
the smart meter readings for the milliammeter readings. For example, with URV input pressure
applied, assume that the meter reads 396 inH2O instead of 400 inH2O. In this case, the
meter reading is less than 100% (or 20 mA).

9 a) Press and hold SPAN button on local zero and span assembly or smart meter.

ATTENTION

The smart meter readings revert to the default unit of percent (%) during this operation. If the
error code Er0 appears on the display, you are working with a model STD110 transmitter that
does not support the local zero and span adjustments.

b) Press Increase button once to complete this function.

ATTENTION

If the error code Er4 appears, you are trying to set a SPAN value that is outside acceptable
limits for your transmitter. Readjust applied pressure to be within acceptable range limits and
repeat this procedure. The smart meter display goes blank for a 1/2 second and then returns
reading 100%.

c) Check that milliammeter reading equals 20 mA and release SPAN button.

ATTENTION

If milliammeter reading doesnt change, be sure you are not working with a model STD110
transmitter that ignores local adjustments. The smart meter readings return to the set
engineering units after you release the SPAN button.

10 Wait 30 seconds so that changes are copied to the transmitters non-volatile memory.

11 Remove applied pressure and turn OFF transmitter power.

12 Replace end-cap on PWA side of electronics housing and tighten lock.

13 Remove milliammeter from TEST terminals and replace end-cap and tighten lock.

14 Turn ON transmitter power and check smart meter reading, if applicable.

182 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

ST 3000
+
Power
Supply -

- SIGNAL +
+

-
TEST
+
Receiver Field
Terminals
250 ohm

VAR UPPER
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100

000
UNITS
SPAN

SET

AN ALOG In H 2 O
Smart Meter with ZERO LOWER
VALUE Milliammeter
Local Zero and Span
installed on PWA side
of electronics housing

Figure A-2 Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span
Adjustments.

Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons


The smart meter can be set to show the PV output in engineering units that are appropriate for your process
application. You can select an available engineering unit or enter a custom one including upper and lower
display limits settings for the smart meters digital readout using buttons on the face of the meter.

Using the Smart Meter


Follow these guidelines when configuring the smart meter:

If you initiate a command with the HART communicator at the same time a button is pressed on the smart
meter, the smart meter will respond to the command it receives last. In other words, the last command
wins.
In most cases, you can press and release a button for one-shot operation, or press and hold a button for
continuous, 1/2 second, repetitive operation.
Active setup field will begin to flash at one second rate if next action is not initiated within one second.
And, if no action is taken within 30 seconds, the setup function will time out and the meter will return to
its previous state.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 183
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration


Normally when using a differential type transmitter, you can select the transmitters output to represent a
straight linear calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurement applications. This linear or
square root output parameter selection is called output conformity or output form. (See Section 6 for more
details on output conformity.)
When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output measurement, there are certain rules to
keep in mind which are dependent on the output conformity selection. These rules are described in the
following paragraphs.
The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the engineering units you can select for the smart
meter display.
When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of LINEAR, you can select only pressure
type engineering units. (See Table A-5.)
When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of SQUARE ROOT, you can select only
flow type engineering units GPM and GPH.
The percent and custom engineering units can be selected regardless of output conformity configuration.

Table A-5 Smart Meter Engineering Units Code

Smart Meter Code Engineering Unit Transmitter Output


Conformity

EU0 % * Linear or Square Root

EU1 in H2O *

EU2 mmHg *

EU3 PSI *

EU4 kPa

EU5 MPa

EU6 mbar Linear

EU7 bar

EU8 g/cm2

EU9 kg/cm2

EUA mmH2O

EUB inHg

EUC mH2O

EUD GPM * Square Root

EUE GPH * Square Root

EUF Custom Linear or Square Root

* These selections have indicators on smart meter display.


Use stick-on labels provided for other engineering units.

184 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Additionally, the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the lower and upper display limits to
represent transmitters 0 to 100% output.
If you select pressure type engineering units, you cannot set the lower or upper display limits. These
values are automatically set when you select the engineering units.
You can set only the upper display limit when the transmitter is configured for SQUARE ROOT output
conformity. The lower display limit is fixed at zero (0) for a transmitter in square root mode and
cannot be changed.
You can set both the lower and upper display limits when you have selected custom engineering units
(EUF) and the transmitter output conformity is set to LINEAR.
When setting the lower and upper display limits, if you let either the lower or upper display limit setting
time out (after thirty seconds), the meter will discard the newly set values and will revert to its previous
settings. The meter forces you to set both limits by automatically initiating the next limit setting, either
lower or upper, depending upon which limit you set first.
If you change the transmitters output conformity, you must reconfigure the smart meter as outlined in
Tables A-6, A-7 and A-8 or Table A-9. See also Meter/transmitter interaction in this appendix.

Selecting Engineering Units


The procedure in Table A-6 outlines the steps for selecting the desired engineering units for a smart meter
using its local adjustments on the face of the meter. You will be selecting the unit of measurement that
you want the smart meter to indicate during normal operation.

WARNING

When the transmitters end-cap is removed, the housing is not explosionproof.

Table A-6 Selecting Engineering Units

Step Action Result

1 Loosen lock on meter end-cap and unscrew cap


from housing. Be sure transmitter power is ON.

2 Press UNITS SET button. Display shows code for current engineering units
setting.

VAR UPPE R
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100

EU 0
UNITS

%
SET

ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 185
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Step Action Result

3 Press Increase key to call up next code or Selection codes for engineering units
Decrease key to call up previous code. Repeat
this action until desired code is on display.
You can hold down the Increase or Decrease key VA R UPPE R

to scroll forward or backward through the codes. SEL. VALUE

0 % 100

EU 1
ATTENTION UNIT S

SE T

Remember that if transmitter is configured for ANALOG

SQUARE ROOT output conformity the only valid


In H 2 O LOWER
VALUE

code selections are: EU0 (%)


EUD (GPM)
Press and hold to
EUE (GPH) scroll backward
Press and hold to
scroll forward
EUF (Custom) through selections EU0 = %* through selections
EU1 = inH2O*
If transmitter is configured for LINEAR output EU2 = mmHg*
EU3 = PSI*
conformity EU0 (%) to EUC and EUF (CUSTOM) EU4 = KPa
are valid code selections. EU5 = MPa
EU6 = mbar
EU7 = bar
EU8 = g/cm2
EU9 = Kg/cm2
EUA = mmH2O
EUB = inHg
EUC = mH2O
*These selections
EUD = GPM* have indicators on
EUE = GPH* the display.
EUF = Custom

4 Press UNITS SET button to lock in selected code.

ATTENTION VAR UPPE R


SEL. VALUE

If you select an invalid code according to the 0 % 100


selections in Step 3, the meter display will show
0. 1 8
UNITS

an error code Er1 for one second and then return SET

to the previous engineering units selection. ANALOG


In H 2 O LOWER
VALU E

Goes blank for 1/2 second and returns with


Digital reading now
reading in engineering units in engineering units
of inches of water

5 If selected engineering unit does not match one of Use stick-on label for engineering units without
six unit indicators on meter, peel off matching indicators on display.
stick-on unit label from sheet (drawing number
30756918-001) and paste it in lower right hand
corner of meter.
VAR UPPE R
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100

1. 0 2
UNITS

SET

ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
Kg/cm2

Stick-on label
identifies selected
engineering units

186 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Step Action Result

6 If you selected Custom or Flow engineering units, Lower and upper display limits have not been set
go to Tables A-7 and A-8 to set lower and upper for custom or flow engineering units.
display limits for smart meter display.

VA R UPPER
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100

U- L
UNITS

SET
FLOW

ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
GPM

Setting Lower and Upper Display Values


The table below shows the restrictions on setting the display values for given engineering units and output
conformity selections.

Engineering Output Set


Units code Conformity Lower Display Value? Upper Display Value?
EU0 through EUC Linear No (set automatically) No (set automatically)
(Pressure type units)
EU0, EUD, EUE,and EUF Square root No (fixed at zero) Yes
(%, GPM, GPH, or Custom) Use Table A-8
EUF Linear Yes Yes
(Custom) Use Table A-7 Use Table A-8

To set the lower and upper display limit values for the meter display perform the procedures in Tables A-7
and A-8. Also note that in each procedure you must:
First set the magnitude range for each display value. This enables the multiplier (K) on the display for
indicating larger ranges (greater than 19999 and shifts the decimal point of the digital display left or
right depending on the precision you want to show for that value).
Next set the display value. This procedure sets the display limit of the meter to represent minimum and
maximum transmitter output (0% and 100 % output).
Note: Magnitude range and display values are set for both upper and lower (if applicable) display limits.

During normal operation the display range of the meter digital readout is 19,990,000 and is automatically
ranged to provide the best precision possible for the digits available up to 1/100th of a unit.

ATTENTION

Please read through the entire procedure before beginning.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 187
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Setting Lower Display Values


The procedure in Table A-7 outlines the steps for setting the lower display limit to represent the 0 percent
(LRV) output of the transmitter.

ATTENTION

For example purposes, the procedures in Tables A-7 and A-8 assume that the lower value is
to be set at 0 and the upper value is to be set at 19,990,000 for a CUSTOM unit in a
transmitter with a LINEAR output, and the transmitters present output is exactly 50 percent.

Table A-7 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display

Step Action Result

1 You have completed units selection in Table A-6 If lower limit display value was previously set,
and U-L appears on the display. Press LOWER KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value
VALUE button to initiate lower display limit setting flashes in display.
function.

ATTENTION VA R
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE

This procedure is only applicable for Custom 0 % 100

0 .0 0
UNITS

(EUF) engineering unit selection in a transmitter SET

configured for LINEAR output conformity.


ANALOG
LOWER

The lower display value for transmitters configured KNOWN VALUE


VALUE

for SQUARE ROOT output conformity is fixed at


zero (0.00) and cannot be changed. Previously set
value flashes in
display and
indicator lights

2 Press LOWER VALUE button again within 5 Display shows magnitude range selection.
seconds to access magnitude range setting.
Otherwise, meter exits limit setting function.
NOTE: Magnitude range enables the multiplier (K)
for indicating larger ranges and shifts the decimal VAR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE

point of the digital display left or right depending


0 % 100
on which button is pushed. The display shows
19 .99
UNITS

largest positive number for given range selection SE T

so you can select a range that is just larger than ANALOG


the range to be set for best display precision. LOWER
VALUE

ATTENTION

The magnitude range selection only applies for setting the meter display limits. This selection does not
affect the normal operation of the meter. During normal operation, the display is automatically ranged to
provide the best precision possible.

188 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Step Action Result

3 Press Increase button to shift the decimal point Magnitude range selections.
to the right and increase the magnitude range or
Decrease button to shift the decimal point to the
left and decrease the magnitude range.
VA R UPPE R
Repeat this action until desired selection is on SEL. VALUE

display. 0 % 100

19 .9 9
UNITS

Also you can hold the respective key to scroll SET

forward or backward through the selections. ANALOG


LOWER
VALUE

Press and hold to Press and hold to


scroll backward scroll forward
through selections 19.99 through selections
199.9
1999
19.99K*
199.9K* *The "K" multiplier
indicator appears
1999K* below the digital
19990K* reading on the display.

4 Press LOWER VALUE button to initiate lower Readout goes blank except for first active digit
display value setting. which will be 0 unless lower value was set before.

V AR UPPE R
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100

0
UNITS

SET

ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 189
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Step Action Result

5 Press Increase button to select the next First digit value setting.
available digit value or Decrease button to select
the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display. VAR UPPE R
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100
6 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in first digit
0
UNITS

and activate next active digit. SET

Readout now displays next active digit which will


ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE

be zero unless lower value was set before.

Press and hold to Press and hold to


7 Press Increase button to select the next scroll backward scroll forward
available digit value or Decrease button to select through values 0 through values
the previous digit value. 1
2
Repeat this action until desired value is on
3
display.
4
5
8 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in second 6
digit and activate next active digit. 7
8
Readout now displays next active digit which will 9
be zero unless lower value was set before.

9 Press Increase button to select the next Third digit value setting.
available digit value or Decrease button to select
the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on VAR UPPE R
display. SEL. VALUE

0 % 100

0 .0 0
UNITS

10 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in third digit SET

and activate next active digit. ANALOG


LOWER
VALUE

Readout now displays next active digit which will


be BLANK unless lower value was set to 1 before.
Press and hold to Press and hold to
scroll backward scroll forward
11 Press Increase button to set digit to 1 or through values 0 through values
Decrease button to set it to BLANK. 1
2
3
12 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in 1 digit 4
and activate sign segment. 5
Readout now displays sign segment which will be 6
BLANK for positive values unless lower value was 7
set for negative () values before. 8
9

190 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Step Action Result

13 Press Increase button to set sign segment to Sign segment setting.


minus sign for negative values or Decrease
button to set it to BLANK. for positive values.

VAR UPPE R

14 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in current SEL. VALUE

settings as lower display value limit. 0 % 100

0 .0 0
UNITS

ATTENTION SET

For CUSTOM unit in transmitter with LINEAR


ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE

output, you must set both lower and upper display


limits for values to take effect. If you let either the
lower or upper display limit time out (after 30 Press to set sign Press to set sign
seconds), the meter discards both newly set segment as segment as minus
BLANK for
values and reverts back to the previously set positive values
sign (-) for negative
values
values.

If you have not yet set the upper display limit value, the meter automatically enters the upper display
setting function after it displays previously set value, if applicable. Go to Table A-8.
If you have already set the upper display limit value, this completes the lower and upper display limits
setting function for Custom engineering units in the transmitter. Meter returns to normal operation.

Setting Upper Display Values


The procedure in Table A-8 outlines the steps for setting the upper display limit to represent the 100
percent (URV) output of the transmitter.

ATTENTION

This procedure applies only for Flow units (GPM or GPH) in a transmitter configured for
SQUARE ROOT output conformity, or CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for linear or
square root output conformity.

Table A-8 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display

Step Action Result

1 Press UPPER VALUE button to initiate upper If upper limit display value was previously set,
display limit setting function. KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value
flashes in display.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 191
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Step Action Result

2 Press UPPER VALUE button again within 5 Display shows magnitude range selection.
seconds to access magnitude range setting.
Otherwise, meter exits limit setting function.
NOTE: Magnitude range enables the multiplier
V AR UPPE R
(K) for indicating larger ranges and shifts the SEL. VALUE

decimal point of the digital display left or right 0 % 100


depending on which button is pushed. The
19 .99
UNITS

display shows largest positive number for given SET

range selection so you can select a range that is ANALOG


LOWER

just larger than the range to be set for best display VALUE

precision.

ATTENTION

The magnitude range selection only applies for setting the display limits. This selection does not affect
the normal operation of the meter. During normal operation, the display is automatically ranged to provide
the best precision possible.

3 Press Increase button to shift the decimal point Magnitude range selections with largest range
to the right and increase the magnitude range or selected.
Decrease button to shift the decimal point to the
left and decrease the magnitude range.
Repeat this action until desired selection is on V AR UPPE R
display. For example purposes only, largest SEL. VALUE

range 19990K is selected in this procedure. 0 % 100

19 9 90
UNITS

Also you can hold the respective key to scroll SET

forward or backward through the selections. ANALOG


LOWER
VALUE
K

Press and hold to Press and hold to


scroll backward scroll forward
through selections 19.99 through selections
199.9
1999
19.99K*
199.9K* *The "K" multiplier
indicator appears
1999K* below the digital
19990K* reading on the display.

4 Press UPPER VALUE button to initiate upper Readout goes blank except for first active digit
value setting. which will be 0 unless upper value was set before.

V AR UPPE R
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100

00
UNITS

SET

ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K

192 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Step Action Result

5 Press Increase button to select the next First digit value setting is set to 9.
available digit value or Decrease button to select
the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on display VAR UPPE R
use 9 for example purposes. SEL. VALUE

0 % 100

90
UNITS

SET

ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K

Press and hold to Press and hold to


scroll backward scroll forward
through values 0 through values
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

6 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in first digit


and activate next active digit.
Readout now displays next active digit which will V AR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE

be zero unless upper value was set before.


0 % 100

0 90
UNITS

SET

7 Press Increase button to select the next


available digit value or Decrease button to select
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE

the previous digit value. K

Repeat this action until desired value is on


display.

8 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in second


digit and activate next active digit.
Readout now displays next active digit which will VAR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE

be zero unless upper value was set before. 0 % 100

0 9 90
UNITS

SE T

ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 193
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Step Action Result

9 Press Increase button to select the next Next digit value setting is set to 9.
available digit value or Decrease button to select
the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on display VA R UPPE R
use 9 for example purposes. SEL. VALUE

0 % 100

9 9 90
UNI TS

10 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in third digit SET

and activate next active digit. ANALOG


LOWER
VALUE

Readout now displays next active digit which will K


be BLANK unless upper value was set to 1 before.
Press and hold to Press and hold to
scroll backward scroll forward
through values 0 through values
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

11 Press Increase button to set digit to 1 or


Decrease button to set it to BLANK.
1 digit value setting is set to 1. VAR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE

0 % 100

1 99 90
UNITS

SET

ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K

Press to set "1" Press to set "1"


digit as BLANK digit as 1

12 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in 1 digit Readout now displays sign segment which will be
and activate sign segment. BLANK for positive values unless upper value was
set for negative () values before.

13 Press Increase button to set sign segment to


minus sign for negative values or Decrease
button to set it to BLANK. for positive values. VA R UPPER
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100

199 90
UNIT S

SET
Sign segment
is BLANK for ANALOG
LOWER
positive values VALUE
and minus sign K
for negative
values

194 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Step Action Result

14 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in current Display goes blank for a 1/2 second and returns to
settings as upper display value and return to display readout equal to 50% output.
previous display. Upper display limit setting is now
complete. In this example, readout is 9, 990,000 CUSTOM
unit for 50% display range of 0 to 19,990,000
CUSTOM for transmitter with LINEAR output.

For CUSTOM unit in transmitter with LINEAR


output, you must set both lower and upper display
limits for values to take effect. If you let either the VAR UPPE R
lower or upper display limit time out (after 30 SEL. VALUE

seconds), the meter discards both newly set 0 % 100


values and reverts back to the previously set
99 90
UNITS

values. SET

ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K

If you have not yet set the lower display limit value for CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for
LINEAR output mode, the meter automatically enters the lower display setting function after it
displays previously set value, if applicable. Go to Table A-7, Step 3.
If you have already set the lower display limit value, this completes the lower and upper display limits
setting function for CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for LINEAR output mode. Meter returns
to normal operation.
If you have just set the upper display limit for Flow unit or CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for
SQUARE ROOT output mode, this completes the limit setting function. Meter returns to normal
operation.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 195
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Setting smart meter display using the HART communicator

Setting smart meter display using the HART communicator


Using the Hart Communicator to Configure the Smart Meter Display
You can select an available engineering unit or enter a custom one including upper and lower limit settings
for the smart meters digital readout using the HART communicator. Use the procedure in Table A-9 to
setup the smart meter display with the HART communicator.

Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration


Normally when using a differential type transmitter, you can select the transmitters output to represent a
straight linear calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurement applications. This linear or
square root output parameter selection is called output conformity or output form. (See Section 6 in this
User manual for more details.)
When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output measurement, there are certain rules to
keep in mind which are dependent on the output conformity selection. These rules are described in the
following paragraphs. Refer to Table A-5 also for meter set up restrictions.
1. The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the engineering units you can select for the
smart meter display.
When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of LINEAR, you can select only pressure
type engineering units. (See Table A-5.)
When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of SQUARE ROOT, you can select only
flow type engineering units GPM and GPH.
The percent (%) and custom engineering units can be selected regardless of output conformity
configuration.
2. Additionally, the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the lower and upper display limits to
represent transmitters 0 to 100% output. The table below shows the restrictions on setting display
values for given engineering units and output conformity selections.

Engineering Output Set


Units code Conformity Lower Display Value? Upper Display Value?
EU0 through EUC Linear No (set automatically) No (set automatically)
(Pressure type units)
EU0, EUD, EUE,and EUF Square root No (fixed at zero) Yes
(%, GPM, GPH, or Custom)
Custom Linear Yes Yes

3. If you change the transmitters output conformity, you must reconfigure the smart meter as outlined in
Table A-9. See also Meter/transmitter interaction in this appendix.

ATTENTION

After making any adjustments to the smart meter, keep the transmitter powered for at least 30
seconds so that the new meter configuration is written to non-volatile memory. If power is
turned off before 30 seconds, the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter
power is restored, the meter configuration will revert to the previous settings.

196 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Setting smart meter display using the HART communicator

Table A-9 Smart meter display setup using HART communicator

Step Action

1 Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.

2 From Online menu, choose the following menu selections:


Device setup

Basic setup

Local meter

3 The Local meter display will appear.

ST3000:PT 3011
Local meter

1 Installed Yes
2 Units %

HELP SAVE HOME

ATTENTION

You can set up the smart meter display using this procedure even if the meter is not installed
in the transmitter.

4 Determine whether the current engineering unit (Units) for the meter display is correct for your
process application.
If it is correct, press HOME (end of procedure).

If not, determine the desired engineering unit for the meter display from Table A-5.
Also determine the correct output conformity selection (Linear or Square Root) for the
transmitter output and meter EU. See Table A-5 for EU and output conformity selections.

5 To change output conformity:


Press the left arrow key to show the Basic setup display.

6 Scroll down to highlight PV xfer fnctn (Output conformity) and select it by pressing the right
arrow key. The Transfer function display appears.
Select the correct Transfer function (Linear or Square root) and press ENTER. Press SEND to
download change to the transmitter.

7 You will be warned that pressing OK will change device output. Press OK.

8 When prompted, return the loop to automatic control and press OK.
The communicator will return to the Basic setup display.

9 To change engineering units for meter display:


Scroll up to highlight Local meter and select it by pressing the right arrow key.

10 Select Units by pressing the number 2 key.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 197
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Setting smart meter display using the HART communicator

Step Action

11 Scroll through the list of engineering units using the up and down arrow keys and select the
desired units, then press ENTER. The available units are listed below for reference.
% mbar mH2O
inH2O bar gal/min
mmHg g/Sqcm gal/h
psi kg/Sqcm Custom
kPa mmH2O
MPa inHg
Note: Be sure that the engineering unit that is selected is compatible with the output
conformity selection in Table A-5.

12 Press SEND to download change to the transmitter.

13 If Upper and Lower appear on the screen, select Upper and enter the upper limit value for
the meter display. Press ENTER.
Select Lower and enter the lower limit value for the meter display. Press ENTER.
Note: If square root output conformity is selected, the lower display limit is fixed at zero and
cannot be changed.

14 Press SEND to download changes to the transmitter.

ATTENTION

If an error message appears,

Invalid unit occurred writing Units. Restore device value? or


Invalid meter option occurred writing Lower. Restore device value?

You have tried to download an invalid parameter for the meter display.

198 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Typical smart meter indications

Typical smart meter indications


Table A-10 summarizes typical smart meter indications. Note that other combinations of status messages
are possible.

Table A-10 Summary of Typical Smart Meter Indications.


Meter Indication What It Means Meter Indication What It Means
No power Meter has
applied. detected
transmitter output
that is not-a-
0 % 100 0 % 100 number.

- - -

Normal display Display range is


for transmitter in Over Limit.
Analog mode with Transmitter output
digital readout in is over 200%.
0 % 100 inches of water. 0 % 100
(O-L is alternately

20 0 O-L
displayed with the
200% value in
engineering units.)
ANALOG In H 2 O

K GPM

Normal display Transmitter is in


for transmitter in output mode.
HART mode Bargraph and
and square root readout show
0 % 100 output. Digital 0 % 100 value that was

99 90 10 0 .0
readout is gallons entered through
per minute with % the communicator.
FLOW 1000 multiplier.
OUTPUT MODE

K GPM
Transmitter in Input pressure
HART mode is equal to or greater
in non-critical than 200%.
status. Displayed Display flashes
0 % 100 value may not be 0 % 100 between 200% (or

7 7 .9 20 0 .0
valid. If display is corresponding
% - - - instead of a % value in EU) and
value, transmitter O-L. Transmitter
is in critical locks output at
CHECK STATUS status. 200% and will go
no higher
regardless of input.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 199
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Operation error codes

Operation error codes


Table A-11 identifies possible meter error codes and what they mean.

Table A-11 Smart Meter Error Codes and Descriptions.

If error indication is . . . Then, it means

You have tried to set local Zero or Span adjustment in a Series


100 transmitter that does not support this option.
VAR UPPER
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100 UNITS

E r0
SPAN
SET

ANALOG LOWER
ZERO VALUE

You have tried to set a pressure type engineering unit for a


transmitter in square root mode (FLOW) or have tried to set a
V AR UPPE R
flow type engineering unit for a transmitter in linear mode
SEL. VALUE
(pressure). After this error is displayed, the meter will return to
0 % 100 the unit # (EU#) of the engineering unit it was displaying before
Er1
UNITS

%
SET
the set function was invoked. You may then select another unit
or exit in the normal fashion.
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE

You have tried to select a process variable for the transmitter


using the VAR SEL. button. The Variable Select button is non-
V AR UPPE R
functioning on the ST 3000 R300 transmitter.
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100
UNITS

Er 2 %
SET

ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE

You have tried to set Lower or Upper display limit for pressure
type engineering units (EU1 to EUC), or Lower display limit for
V AR UPPE R
flow type engineering units (EUD, EUE) or CUSTOM unit (EUF)
SEL. VALUE
in transmitter configured for SQUARE ROOT output. Or, you
0 % 100
UNITS
have tried to set upper display limit for flow or Custom unit in
Er 3 %
SET
transmitter with SQUARE ROOT output and URV set to zero (0).
In SQUARE ROOT mode, the transmitters URV cannot equal
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
zero. The Lower and Upper display limits only apply for
CUSTOM (EUF) unit in transmitter configured for LINEAR
output. The Upper display limit also applies for FLOW (EUD,
EUE) and CUSTOM (EUF) units with transmitter in SQUARE
ROOT mode, but the Lower display limit is fixed at zero (0) and
cannot be changed.

200 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix A Smart Meter Reference - Meter/transmitter interaction

If error indication is . . . Then, it means

You have tried to set a span value that is outside acceptable


limits for your transmitter.
VAR UPPER
SEL. VALUE

0 % 100 UNITS

E r4
SPAN
SET

ANALOG LOWER
ZERO VALUE

You have tried to invoke a smart meter set function with the
transmitters Write Protect jumper in its Read Only position. You
VAR UPPE R
cannot make changes in the smart meter settings when the
SEL. VALUE
transmitters configuration is write protected.
0 % 100
UNITS

Er 5 %
SET

ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE

Meter/transmitter interaction
ATTENTION

After making any adjustments to the smart meter, keep the transmitter powered for at least 30
seconds so that the new meter configuration is written to non-volatile memory. If power is
turned off before 30 seconds, the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter
power is restored, the meter configuration will revert to the previous settings.

Transmitter power cycling


Cycling transmitter power OFF/ON will have no affect on meter configuration. The meter digital readout
will be in the previously set engineering units and applicable upper and lower display limits will be intact
when transmitter power is restored.

Changing output conformity


If you reconfigure the transmitter output conformity from SQUARE ROOT to LINEAR, the meters digital
readout will automatically revert to the default engineering unit of percent (%) and the FLOW indicator
will go out when the change is downloaded to the transmitter.
Likewise, if you reconfigure the transmitter output conformity from LINEAR to SQUARE ROOT, the
meters digital readout will automatically revert to the default engineering unit of percent (%) and the
FLOW indicator will light when the change is downloaded to the transmitter. In either case, you must
reconfigure the smart meter display as outlined in Table A-9 of this manual.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 201
- Meter/transmitter interaction

202 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix B Configuration Record Sheet -

Appendix B Configuration Record Sheet

ST 3000 R300 Smart Transmitter


with HART Communications
Configuration Record Sheet
Model Number: ______________________________________________
Series: ___________________________

Measurement Type: DP GP AP
Measurement Range: __________________________________
Mode of Operation: ________________________
Tag Number: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Long Tag: __________________________________

PV Unit (Engineering Units): inH2O inHg ftH2O mmH2O

mmHg psi bar mbar g/Sq cm

kg/Sq cm Pa kPa torr atm

MPa inH2O @ 4 degC mmH2O @ 4 degC

inH2O @ 60 degF
PV LRV (Lower Range Value): 4mAdc = _____________________
PV URV (Upper Range Value): 20 mAdc = _____________________

PV Transfer Function (Output Conformity): Linear Square Root

PV Damping time (Seconds): 0.00 0.16 0.32 0.48

1.00 2.00 4.00 8.00

16.0 32.0

SV Unit (Secondary variable): deg C deg F deg R K

PV AO Alarm Type (Failsafe Direction): Upscale (Hi) Downscale (Lo)

Write Protect Option: Read and Write Read only


Poll Address ________

Configured By: _______________________________________ Date: ____ / ____ / ____

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 203
-

204 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix C Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods

Appendix C Freeze Protection of Transmitters

Problem
When water is present in the process fluid and ambient temperatures can fall below the freezing point
(32F/0C), pressure transmitters and their piping require freeze protection. Transmitters may also require
continuous heating, if the process fluid is tar, wax, or other medium which will solidify at normal ambient.
However, uncontrolled steam or electric heating, in addition to wasting energy, can cause errors and
accidentally destroy the transmitter.

Possible Solutions/Methods
Solution
These two basic solutions are possible:
Eliminate the need for heating the transmitter by keeping the freezable process fluid out of direct contact
with transmitter.
Control the steam or electric heat to prevent overheating on warm days while protecting against freeze-ups
under the coldest conditions.
The following paragraphs in this appendix describe a number of methods for implementing both solutions.

Sealing liquid method


The simplest and least costly method is to use a sealing liquid in the transmitter meter body and its impulse
piping to the process. The small contact (interface) area between the sealing liquid and the process fluid
reduces the mixing of the two fluids.
You should select a sealing liquid that has a greater specific gravity than the process fluid to inhibit mixing.
It also must have freezing and boiling temperatures compatible with the range of temperatures existing at
the site, including the heated interface.

WARNING

The user must verify the compatibility of any sealing liquid with their process fluid.

A reliable sealing liquid is a 50/50 percent (by volume) solution of ethylene-glycol and water. This solution
has a specific gravity of 1.070 at 60F (15C), a freezing temperature of 34F (36C), and a boiling
temperature of +225F (+106C) at atmospheric pressure. Conventional antifreeze liquids for automobile
coolant systems such as Prestone and
Zerex are solutions of ethylene-glycol with some rust inhibitors and possibly leak sealants added; they may
be used in place of pure ethylene-glycol.
Another sealing liquid, used in many chemical plants, is dibutylphalate an oily-type liquid with a specific
gravity of 1.045 at 70F (21C). It has a boiling point 645F (340C) and does not freeze so it can be used
down to about 20F (30C).
Figures C-1 and C-2 show typical piping installations for this method. The process fluid must be heated
above its freezing point. This is frequently done by lagging in (insulating) the connecting nipple, shut-off
valve and T connector with the process piping. Where the process piping itself requires heating, a steam
or electric trace is run around their components with consideration given to the boiling point of the sealing
liquid.

5/08 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 205


Appendix C Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods

1/2" seamless pipe nipple 6" long

1/2" pipe cross


with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" seamless pipe nipple 6" long
1/2" shut-off valve (thru
port type desirable) 1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" seamless pipe
(slope at least 1" 1/2" shut-off valve (thru 1/2" seamless pipe
per foot downward port type desirable) (short as possible to
reduce head effect)

1/2" pipe union


or coupling
1/2" 3-valve Process pressure
manifold, transmitter
standard type
Differential
pressure
transmitter

Figure C-1 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity
Heavier Than Process Fluid.

1/2" shut-off valve (thru


port type desirable) 1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs

1/2" seamless
pipe nipple 6" 1/2" pipe cross
long with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" seamless pipe
(slope at least 1"
1/2" seamless 1/2" seamless pipe
per foot downward
pipe nipple 6" long (short as possible to
reduce head effect)

1/2" shut-off 1/2" pipe union


valve (thru port or coupling
type desirable)
1/2" 3-valve Process pressure
manifold, transmitter
standard type
Differential
pressure
transmitter
Make both HP and LP
connections as shown.

Figure C-2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter
Than Process Fluid.

The installation should be checked every 6 to 12 months to verify that the sealing liquid is at its required
specific gravity.

206 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix C Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods

Purging
Purging air or water purges are commonly used to prevent viscous materials from clogging the impulse
lines to pressure, level, or flow transmitters. The bubbler system, using a constant-air flow regulator, is
particularly common on open tank liquid level applications. No heating of impulse lines or transmitter is
required, but normal precautions are required to keep water out of the air supply system.

Gas applications
We must not overlook the possibility of condensate freezing in impulse lines to transmitters measuring gas
flow or pressure. Although these components could be heated similar to water and steam applications, the
simplest and best approach is to install transmitters so that they are self draining. This means that the
impulse lines are connected to the lowest point in the transmitter meter body and the piping is sloped
downward at least one inch per foot. (Side-connected transmitters with vent-drains at a lower point in the
meter body must be regularly checked to assure condensate removal.) If the transmitter is located below the
process taps (not recommended), piping must still run downward from the transmitter to the drain point and
then up to the process as shown in Figure C-3. Steam or electric heating of the drain point will prevent
pipe rupture due to freezing.

Transmitter

Figure C-3 Piping Installation for Gas Flow.

Mechanical (diaphragm) seals


Diaphragm seals on the impulse lines provide the most expensive, yet broadest application of all the
methods. Similar in principle to the liquid seals, diaphragm seals eliminate the possibility of seal liquid
carry-over into the process fluid. This eliminates the need for periodic maintenance checks to assure full
and equal liquid seal legs. Welded diaphragm seals with special fills permit temperatures from 34 to
600F (36 to 315C) at the process interface which can therefore be steam or electrically heated to assure
viscosity of tars and similar high-freezing point fluids under the coldest conditions.
You must be careful to specify large enough diaphragms to accommodate expansion and contraction of the
fill fluid under varying temperatures without overextending the diaphragm into its stiff area. In general,
conventional diaphragm seals are satisfactory for pressure ranges above approximately 75 psig with special
large diameter elements required for low pressure or differential pressure measurements.
You can lag (insulate) impulse lines and diaphragm seals with the process piping, but this practice is only
common with liquid level applications involving highly viscous materials unsuitable for 1/2-inch impulse

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 207
Appendix C Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods

lines. Use a tank-mounted flanged seal in such installations. Otherwise, it is more desirable to keep the
capillary lengths short, the transmitter accessible for maintenance, and (for flow applications) the normal 3-
valve manifold assembly close to the transmitter for normal service checks. Thus, the impulse lines,
valving and diaphragm seals with 1/2-inch connections would be electrically or steam traced, with high
temperature steam permitted without damage to the transmitter. Figures C-4 and C-5 show typical piping
layouts.

The impulse piping, 3-valve


manifold, and upper flanges
of the metal diaphragm seals
must be insulated and, where
required, also heated by
electric or steam.

1/2" , 3-valve manifold


(standard type with
suitable temperature rating)

Differential pressure
transmitter with metal
diaphragm seals

Figure C-4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with


Metal Diaphragm Seals.

Impulse piping, shut-off valve, and


diaphragm seal distance must be as
short as possible and insulated along
with the process pipe or vessel

Shut-off valve
Process pressure
transmitter with Pipe union or
metal diaphragm coupling
seal

Figure C-5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with


Metal Diaphragm Seal.

208 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix C Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods

Electric heating
Most transmitters will withstand higher temperatures at their process interfaces (bodies) than at their
electronics. Normally, it is impractical to heat transmitter bodies above 225 to 250F (107 to 121C)
without radiant and conducted heat exceeding the rating at the electronics (normally 200F/93C).
Prefabricated insulated enclosures with integral heating coils and thermostats set at 200F (93C) can
assure viscosity of fluids which freeze below 180F (82C) while assuring safe transmitter operation. For
water or similar lower-temperature mediums, the control can be set at 50F (10C) to save energy and call
for heat only when temperature and wind conditions require.
Systems can be engineered for uncontrolled, continuous electric heating to prevent water freezing at 0F (
18C) and 20 mph wind velocity, while not exceeding 225F (107C) at the transmitter body at 90F
(32C) ambient and zero wind velocity. The operating costs in energy for these systems usually exceed the
high initial cost of the thermostat systems. Never attempt to maintain freeze points above 100F (38C)
without thermostat controls since the Btu required to prevent freezing will normally exceed the body
temperature rating under opposite extremes.
Although systems are available with hollow bolts replacing the normal transmitter body bolts and
containing electrical heating elements and thermostats, certain precautions are required with such
arrangements. Some transmitter meter body bolts are too small to accept the available thermostats. Also
thermostat settings should not approach the body temperature limit because the heat gradient across the
meter body can be such that limits are exceeded adjacent to the heating elements even when the thermostat
setting is lower.
Electrical heating systems are available in explosionproof ratings for Class I, Group D, Division I and II
installations.
The possibility of electric supply failure must be considered. For this reason, we recommend using alarm
devices with manual acknowledgment and reset. Figures C-6 and C-7 show typical piping installations.

Electric heating cable

Temperature
sensor

1/2" , 3-valve manifold


(standard type )
Temperature
controller Differential pressure
(thermostat) transmitter

Insulated enclosure

Figure C-6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Electric Heating and Control.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 209
Appendix C Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods

Shut-off valve

Shut-off valve
Electric heating
Union or coupling cable

Process pressure
transmitter

Insulated
enclosure

Temperature
controller
(thermostat)
Temperature
sensor

Figure C-7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Electric Heating Control.

Steam heating
Steam heating is perhaps the most common, yet potentially the most damaging method of protecting
transmitters from freeze-ups. Since steam is generated for use in the overall process operation, it is
considered an available by-product. The most important point to remember when steam heating transmitter
meter bodies is the temperature of the steam that will be used and its pressure. We recommend that you
review the next paragraph Superheated steam considerations to get a better understanding of the
temperature problem with steam heating. In brief, do not assume that 30 psig steam is 274F (134C) and
cannot damage a transmitter rated for 250F (121C). With steam heating, as with electrical, you should
use insulated transmitter body housing, impulse piping and valves.
It is common practice to use conventional steam traps on all steam heating systems. They permit live,
superheated steam to enter the heating coils and piping down to the trap. You should also use conventional
steam traps with lower pressure desuperheated steam which cannot overheat the transmitter under warm-
day conditions. If the heating pipes are not carefully installed to eliminate low spots and trapped condensate
in the piping, they could freeze at low temperatures.
All steam traps require a periodic maintenance program. Dirt, scale, and water softeners will cause traps to
stick or jam which result in their either blowing steam continuously or not blowing steam, allowing
condensate freeze-up in cold weather. When steam traps are used for cold-weather freeze protection of
water lines, a thermostat controlled steam supply valve, which will shut off the steam at ambient
temperatures higher than 50F (10C), will save steam and prevent overheating.
A more general solution is offered by a specialized type of trap which throttles condensate flow based on
its temperature. This backs up hot water in the radiator within the insulated transmitter enclosure, assuring
temperatures no higher than the saturated steam at the reduced pressure. Models are available to set the
condensate temperature from about 70 to 200F (21 to 93C). They must be located within 6 to 12 inches

210 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix C Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods

(15 to 30 cm) of the transmitter body and, like all steam traps, they also require periodic maintenance. The
engineering of this type system is more complex than electric systems since the amount of heat loss
upstream of the CTV valve under varying conditions will determine the location of the steam/water
interface. It could occur within the heater coil or further up the steam line, thus affecting the heating
efficiency within the insulated enclosure. Therefore, steam control of materials which freeze or become too
viscous above 100F (38C) should probably not be attempted without some experimenting with the
specific piping layout used.
Uncontrolled steam heating, even with the best pressure regulation and desuperheating of steam, should not
be used to maintain transmitter temperatures above 100F (38C), since this type of fixed Btu input must
either over or under-heat under normal ambient swings.
As with electric heating, there are many types of commercial steam heating units available such as radiant
heaters, hollow meter body studs or just tubing lagged to the impulse piping and transmitter body. The
same precaution applies to the use of hollow studs as on the electrical versions.
Figures C-8 and C-9 show typical piping installations. Table C-1 summarizes the temperature ranges for
the various freeze protection systems.

Steam Supply (low pressure)


Pipe insulated with
waterproof outer cover

Shut-off valve 1/4" OD steam tracer line

Steam heat Impulse piping with


tracer line 1/4" thick insulation

Pipe strap about


every 15"
Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping

Steam trap or 1/2" , 3-valve manifold


condensate (standard type )
temperature
Differential pressure
valvle
transmitter

Insulated enclosure

Condensate return from steam trap. All steam and


condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1"
per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate.
All condensate lines must be protected from freezing.

Figure C-8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Steam Heating.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 211
Appendix C Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods

Steam Supply (low pressure)


1/4" OD steam tracer line
Pipe insulated with
waterproof outer cover
Shut-off valve

Steam heat
Impulse piping with tracer line
1/4" thick insulation

Pipe strap about


Shut-off valve
every 15"
Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping

Shut-off valve

Union or coupling

Process pressure
transmitter

Steam trap or
condensate
temperature Insulated enclosure
valvle
Condensate return from steam trap. All steam and
condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1"
per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate.
All condensate lines must be protected from freezing.

Figure C-9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Steam Heating.

Table C-1 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems

Operating Liquid Seals Diaphragm Steam Heating Electric Heat


Temperature Seals No Seals
Range Ethylene Dibutyl- Trap CTV No Thermo-
F C Glycol Phthalate Valve Control stated
34 36
20 30
50 10
100 38
200 93
225 106
325 163
600 315
Note: Broken lines indicate areas of caution.

212 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix C Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods

Superheated steam considerations


We must remember that the temperature of steam is 212F (100C) only at the normal atmospheric pressure
of about 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute (psia). If the pressure of steam is increased above 14.7 psia,
the temperature of the steam is also increased. For example, if we have steam at 30 pounds per square inch
gage (psig), the steam temperature is 274F (134C).
On industrial flow and pressure measurement applications, we may be required to use steam to heat the
impulse piping to the flow or pressure transmitter, as well as the transmitter itself. For these applications,
we must verify the temperature of the heating steam used. As an example, assume that steam at 100 psig
saturated (338F/170C) is to be reduced to 30 psig pressure for the heating system. Too frequently, it is
assumed that this pressure reduction will result in steam at 274F (134C), the temperature of saturated
steam at 30 psig. Wrong! A reduction of the steam pressure will not appreciably decrease the initial steam
temperature.
In our example, we were talking about saturated steam in the main header from the boiler. But modern
industrial boilers cannot afford to let waste heat go up the stack. After reaching the boiling point in the
drum, the steam flows through a series of pipes in the second pass of the flue gas exit, extracting additional
heat energy and being raised to a temperature higher than the saturation temperature at the same pressure.
This is superheat and, depending on boiler design, it may amount to 50 to 300F (10 to 149C) above the
saturated steam temperature. It also permits packing more heat energy in a given size pipe for transmission
from the process. Thus, in the typical application, the problem of steam heating is compounded by the
additional superheat in the main header.
Specifically, when steam is reduced in pressure, it retains about the same latent heat or the same
Btus/pound at the reduced pressure. Therefore, in our example, steam at 100 psig and 338F (170C) when
reduced to 30 psig steam will have a temperature of 306F (152C) or a loss of only 32F (18C).
This steam temperature can only be reduced by using a desuperheater. This device mixes cold water with
the superheated steam to reduce its temperature by removing Btus per pound of water (steam). It is also
possible to use temperature controlled steam traps, which actually allow the steam to condense to water and
therefore reduce its temperature to a pre-set value.
Table C-2 lists the various values of steam pressure, saturated steam temperatures at these pressures,
degrees of superheat added to the saturated steam and finally the actual temperature of each when it is
reduced to 30 psig steam.

Table C-2 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature Values

Pressure Saturated Superheat Added (3) Final Steam Actual Temperature


(1) Temperature Temperature of Steam When
(2) (2) + (3) Reduced From (1)*
to 30 psig

psig F C F C F C F C

50 298 147 None None 298 147 290 143

100 338 170 100 55 438 225 420 215

150 366 185 120 66 486 251 460 234

200 387 198 150 83 537 281 500 260

400 448 231 200 111 648 342 600 316

600 489 254 250 139 739 393 660 349

* (1) equals pressure in column one with superheat added.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 213
-

214 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix D Hazardous Area Classifications - Introduction

Appendix D Hazardous Area Classifications

Introduction
Reference information
Information is provided to clarify the Hazardous Location installation requirements in North America and
internationally. An explanation of the applicable enclosure classification systems is also provided.

North American Hazardous Location Standards


NEC and CEC electrical codes
Installation of electrical apparatus within hazardous (classified) locations of the United States is conducted
under the provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 500, and within
Canada under the provisions of the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) C22.1, Part 1, Section 18.

Classes
Hazardous (classified) locations, in both the United States and Canada, are categorized into one of three
classes:
Class I - Presence of flammable gases or vapors may be present in quantities sufficient to produce
explosive or ignitable mixtures
Class II - Presence of combustible dusts, powders or grains
Class III - Presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings

Divisions
The classes listed above are further categorized based upon the level of risk present:
Division 1 - Locations in which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors - or combustible
dust in suspension are continuously, intermittently or periodically present under normal
operating conditions.
Division 2 - Locations in which flammable gases or vapors are present, but normally confined within
closed containers or systems from which they can escape only under abnormal or fault
conditions. Combustible dusts are not normally in suspension nor likely to be thrown into
suspension.

Examples
Given the criteria above, the following examples are made:
Class III, Division 1 - A class III, Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers or
material processing combustible flyings are handled, manufactured or used.
Class III, Division 2 - A Class III, Division 2 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers are
stored or handled.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 215
Appendix D Hazardous Area Classifications - North American Hazardous Location Standards

Group classifications
Flammable gases, vapors and ignitable dusts, fibers and flyings are classified into groups according to the
energy required to ignite the most easily-ignitable mixture within air. Group classifications are as follows:

Class I Group Classifications

Group A - Atmospheres containing acetylene.


Group B - Atmospheres containing hydrogen, fuel and combustible process gases
containing more than 30 percent hydrogen by volume, or gases or vapors
of equivalent hazard.
Group C - Atmospheres such as ethyl ether, ethylene, or gasses or vapors of
equivalent hazard.
Group D - Atmospheres such as acetone, ammonia, benzene, butane, cyclopropane,
ethanol, gasoline, hexane, methanol, methane, natural gas, naphtha,
propane or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard.

Class II Group Classifications

Group E - Atmospheres containing combustible metal dusts including aluminum,


magnesium, and their commercial alloys, and other metals of similarly
hazardous characteristics.
Group F - Atmospheres containing combustible carbonaceous dusts including carbon
black, charcoal, coal or other dusts that have been sensitized by other
materials so that they present an explosion hazard.
Group G - Atmospheres containing combustible dusts not included in Group E or F,
including flour, wood, grain, and other dusts of similarly hazardous
characteristics.

Methods of protection
The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use in the given locations.
Protection Designation Permitted Use Principle
Concept

Explosionproof XP Division 1 & 2 Contains explosion and quenches


flame

Intrinsic Safety IS Division 1 & 2 Limit energy of sparks under normal


and fault conditions

Pressurized Type X and Y Division 1 & 2 Keeps flammable gas out

Pressurized Type Z Division 1 & 2 Keeps flammable gas out

Nonincendive NI Division 1 & 2 No arcs, sparks or hot surfaces


under normal conditions

216 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix D Hazardous Area Classifications - North American Hazardous Location Standards

Temperature classification
Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous (classified) location must also be
classified for the maximum surface temperature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as
referenced to either 40 C or the maximum operating ambient of the equipment (whichever is greater). The
maximum surface temperature must be less than the minimum autoignition temperature of the hazardous
atmosphere present. The temperature shall be indicated in identification numbers as listed in Table D-1.

Table D-1 Temperature Identification Numbers (NEC/CEC)

Maximum Temperature Identification

Degrees C Degrees F Number

450 842 T1
300 572 T2
280 536 T2A
260 500 T2B
230 446 T2C

215 419 T2D


200 392 T3
180 356 T3A
165 329 T3B
160 320 T3C

135 275 T4
120 248 T4A
100 212 T5
85 185 T6

Intrinsically safe apparatus parameters


Vmax = Maximum safe voltage which can be applied to the apparatus terminals.
Imax = Maximum safe current which can be applied to the apparatus terminals.
Ci = Unprotected capacitance in the apparatus which can be considered present at the terminals.
Li = Unprotected inductance in the apparatus which can be considered present at the terminals.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 217
Appendix D Hazardous Area Classifications - North American Hazardous Location Standards

Associated apparatus parameters


Voc = Maximum output voltage which can be delivered to the hazardous (classified) location. This
voltage is the maximum from a single channel.
Isc = Maximum output current which can be delivered to the hazardous (classified) location. This
current is the maximum from a single channel.
*Vt = Maximum output voltage which can be delivered to the hazardous (classified) location.
This voltage is the maximum across any combination of terminals of a multiple channel
configuration.
*It = Maximum output current which can be delivered to the hazardous (classified) location. This
current is the maximum through any combination of terminals of a multiple channel
configuration.
Ca = Maximum capacitance which can be connected to the apparatus.
La = Maximum inductance which can be connected to the apparatus.
*CSA does not recognize these parameters at this time

Entity concept
Under entity requirements, the concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated
apparatus, not specifically examined in such combination. The criteria for interconnection is that the
voltage (Vmax) and current (Imax), which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsically
safe, considering faults, must be equal to or greater than the voltage (Voc or Vt) and current (Isc or It)
levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus, considering faults and applicable factors. In
addition, the maximum unprotected capacitance (Ci) and inductance (Li) of the intrinsically safe apparatus,
including interconnecting wiring, must be less than or equal to the capacitance (Ca) and inductance (La)
which can be safely connected to the associated apparatus. If these criteria are met, then the combination
may be connected and remain intrinsically safe. Both FMRC and CSA define the entity parameters as
listed in Tables D-2, D-3 and D-4 below:

Factory Mutual (FM) Approval

Code Description
1C Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D. Dust-Ignitionproof for Class II,
Division 1, Groups E, F & G. Suitable for Class III, Division 1. Conduit seals required
within 18 of enclosure, Group A only.
Intrinsically Safe for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F & G; Class III, Division 1, T4 at 40C, T3A at 93C maximum ambient, when
connected in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51205784.
Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D; Suitable for Classes II & III,
Division 2, Groups F & G, T4 at 93C maximum ambient, hazardous locations. 42 Vdc
max.
Environmental: Indoor and outdoor hazardous locations (NEMA 4X).

218 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix D Hazardous Area Classifications - North American Hazardous Location Standards

Table D-2 FM Entity Parameters

Intrinsic Safety Class I, II, III, Division 1 and 2,


Entity Parameters (1) Groups A- G

VMax 30 V
IMax = 225 mA
PMax = 1.2 W
Ci = 4.2 nF
Li = 0 With no integral indicator, or with
integral smart meter option SM
Li = 150 H With analog meter option ME

(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51205784.

Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

Code Description

2J Explosion Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C & D. Dust-Ignition-Proof for Class II,
Division 1, Groups E, F & G; Class III, Division 1. Conduit seals not required. 42 Vdc
max.
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Groups A, B, C & D; Class II, Groups E, F & G; Class III,
Divisions 1, T4 at 40C, T3A at 93C maximum ambient.
Install per Honeywell drawing 51450806.
Suitable for Class I, II & III, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F & G hazardous locations, T4
at 93C. 42 Vdc max.
Environmental: Indoor and outdoor hazardous locations (Encl 4X).

CSA Certified Barriers (1) Class I, II, III, Division 1 and 2,


Groups

30V / 300
28V / 200 A-G

20V / 150

(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51450806.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 219
Appendix D Hazardous Area Classifications - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications


IEC Classification of hazardous locations
The IEC has established a number of recommendations applying to the construction of explosion protected
electrical apparatus identified. These recommendations are found within IEC 79-0 through 79-15 and 79-28.
For all EC countries as well as various neighboring countries (CENELEC member states), the European
Standards EN 50 014 to EN 50 020 and EN 50 039 apply for the construction of explosion protected
electrical apparatus. They were established on the basis of the IEC Recommendations, however in
comparison they are much more detailed.

Zones
Defined within IEC 7-10, Hazardous locations are categorized into three zones:
Zone 0 - Explosive gas atmosphere is present continuously, or is present for long periods.
Zone 1 - Explosive gas atmosphere is likely to occur in normal operation.
Zone 2 - Explosive gas atmosphere is not likely to occur in normal operation and, if it does occur, it
will exist for a short period only.

Groups
Flammable gases, vapors and mists are classified into groups according to the energy required to ignite the
most easily ignitable mixture within air. Apparatus is grouped according to the atmospheres it may be used
within as follows:
Group IIC - Atmospheres containing acetylene, hydrogen, fuel and combustible process gases or vapors
of equivalent hazard.
Group IIB - Atmospheres such as ethyl ether, ethylene, or gasses or vapors of equivalent hazard.
Group IIA - Atmospheres such as acetone, benzene, butane, cyclopropane, ethanol, gasoline, hexane,
methanol, methane, natural gas, naphtha, propane or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard.

220 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix D Hazardous Area Classifications - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications

Methods of protection
The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use in given locations.
Protection Designation Permitted Use Principle
Concept

Flameproof d Zone 1 & 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame.

Intrinsic Safety ia Zone 0, 1 & 2 Limit energy of sparks under 2 faults.

Intrinsic Safety ib Zone 1 & 2 Limit energy of sparks under 1 fault.

Pressurized p Zone 1 Keeps flammable gas out.

Encapsulation m Zone 1 & 2 Keeps flammable gas out.

Increased Safety e Zone 1 & 2 No arcs, sparks or hot surfaces.

Powder Filled q Zone 1 & 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame.

Oil Immersion o Zone 1 & 2 Keeps flammable gas out.

non-sparking nA No arcs, sparks or hot surfaces under


normal conditions.

Enclosed Break nC Zone 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame.

Limited Energy nA Zone 2 Limit energy of sparks and surface


temperature under normal conditions.

Restricted nR Zone 2 Keeps flammable gas out.


Breathing

Temperature classification
Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous location must also be classified for the
maximum surface temperature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as referenced to the
maximum operating ambient of the equipment. The maximum surface temperature must be less than the
minimum autoignition temperature of the hazardous atmosphere present. The temperature shall be
indicated in identification numbers as listed in Table D-3.

Table D-3 Temperature Identification Numbers (IEC)

Maximum Temperature Identification

Degrees C Degrees F Number

450 842 T1
300 572 T2
200 392 T3
135 275 T4
100 212 T5
85 185 T6

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 221
Appendix D Hazardous Area Classifications - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications

Certification and conformity details

If Code is. . . Then, transmitter option is . . .

1C FM approval body certification for:


Explosionproof/Flameproof Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D
Dust Ignition Proof Class II, III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
Non-Incendive Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G

2J CSA approval body certification for :


Explosionproof Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D
Dust Ignition Proof Class II, III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G

CA IECEx approval body certification for :


Flameproof Zone 1: Ex d IIC
Intrinsically Safe Zone 0/1: Ex ia IIC

SAEx approval body certification for:


Z2 Intrinsically Safe Zone 0/1: Ex ia IIC

ZD Flameproof Zone 1: Ex d IIC

ZA Intrinsically Safe Zone 0/1: Ex ia IIC


(Multiple Marketing)
Flameproof Zone 1: Ex d IIC

ATEX (LCIE) approval body certification for:


3S Intrinsically Safe Zone 0: , Ex ia II C
Intrinsically Safe Zone 1: , Ex ia IIC

ATEX (LCIE) approval body certification for:


33 Dust-tight Zone 0: , Ex tD A20 IP6X

Flameproof and Dust-tight Zone 1: , Ex d IIC, Ex tD A21 IP6X

ATEX (LCIE) approval body certification for:


3N Non-Sparking, Zone 2: , Ex nA IIC, Ex tD A22 IP6X

ATEX (LCIE) approval body certification for:


3C Intrinsically Safe Zone 0/1:, Ex ia IIC, Ex tD A20 IP6X
(Multiple Flameproof Zone 1: , Ex d IIC, Ex tD A21 IP6X
Marketing)
Non-Sparking, Zone 2: , Ex ia IIC, Ex tD A22 IP6X

222 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Appendix D Hazardous Area Classifications - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications

CERTUSP INMETRO (Brazil) approval body certification for:


6D Flameproof Zone 1: BR-Ex d IIC

6S Intrinsically Safe Zone 0/1: BR-Ex ia IIC

9X No certification

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 223
Appendix D Hazardous Area Classifications - Enclosure Ratings

Enclosure Ratings
NEMA and IEC Recognition
The NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) enclosure classifications are recognized in the
US. The IEC Publication 529 Classifications are recognized throughout Europe and those parts of the
world that use the IEC standards as a basis for product certifications. The following paragraphs provide a
discussion of the comparison between NEMA enclosure type numbers and IEC enclosure classification
designations.

IEC Classifications
IEC Publication 529, Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures, provides a system
for specifying the enclosures of electrical equipment on the basis of the degree of protection provided by
the enclosure. IEC 529 does not specify degrees of protection against mechanical damage of equipment,
risk of explosion, or conditions such as moisture (produced for example by condensation), corrosive
vapors, fungus, or vermin.

IEC Designations
Basically, the IEC designation consists of the letters IP followed by two numerals. The first characteristic
numeral indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure with respect to persons and solid
foreign objects entering the enclosure. The second characteristic numeral indicates the degree of protection
provided by the enclosure with respect to the harmful ingress of water.

NEMA Standards
NEMA Standards Publication 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum), does test
for environmental conditions such as corrosion, rust, icing, oil, and coolants. For this reason, and because
the tests and evaluations for other characteristics are not identical, the IEC enclosure classification
designations cannot be exactly equated with NEMA enclosure type numbers.
Table D-4 provides an approximate conversion from NEMA enclosure type numbers to IEC enclosure
classification designations. The NEMA types meet or exceed the test requirements for the associated IEC
classifications; for this reason the Table cannot be used to convert from IEC classifications to NEMA
types.

Table D-4 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC Enclosure
Classification
NEMA Enclosure IEC Enclosure
Type Number Classification Designation
1 IP 10
2 IP 11
3 IP 54
3R IP 14
3S IP 54
4 and 4X IP 56
5 IP 52
6 and 6P IP 67
12 and 12K IP 52
13 IP 54
NOTE: This comparison is based on tests specified in IEC Publication 529

224 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
- Process Sealing for Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2 and Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2, Explosionproof Electrical
Systems

Process Sealing for Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2 and Class I,
Zone 0, 1, and 2, Explosionproof Electrical Systems
ST 3000, Smart Pressure Transmitters
The ST 3000, Series 100, 100e, 600, and 900, Smart Pressure Transmitters are CSA certified as Dual
Seal devices in accordance with ANSI/ISA12.27.012003, Requirements for Process Sealing between
Electrical Systems and Flammable or Combustible Process Fluids.
Accordingly, the ST 3000, Series 100, 100e, 600, and 900, Smart Pressure Transmitters comply with the
sealing requirements of NEC Chapter 5. Special Occupancies, Article 500 Hazardous (Classified)
Locations, Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2, Article 501 Class I Locations, Article 501-15,
Sealing and Drainage, (f) Drainage, (3) Canned Pumps, Process or Service Connections, Etc., Article 505
Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2 Locations, Article 505-16, Sealing and Drainage, (E) Drainage, (3) Canned
Pumps, Process, or Service Connections, and So Forth., and the Canadian Electrical Code rules 18-092, 18-
108, 18-158, J18-108 and J18-158.
Annunciation of a primary seal failure per ANSI/ISA12.27.01 is electronic and is displayed in various
forms based on the type of communication used for the particular transmitter. Failure of the primary seal is
considered a Critical Failure. Based on testing annunciation of primary seal failure will occur in 7 hours or
less.
The transmitters 4-20 mA output will be driven to the selected failsafe direction upscale or downscale.

The transmitters digital output (DE, HART, Fieldbus) will display any of the following responses which
could indicate a primary seal failure as well as other meter body faults.
METER BODY FAULT, MB OVERLOAD, SUSPECT INPUT, SENSOR FAILURE, DEVICE
FAILURE.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 225
-

226 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Index -

Index

A D
Analog meter connections, 38 Damping time, 72
Approvals, 36 adjusting, 72
Canadian Standards Association (CSA), 183 Damping Time Constant, 52
Factory Mutual (FM), 182 Database
save/restore, 109
Device Information, 52
B Diagnostic messages, 146
Barrier diaphragms, 127 communication errors, 146
inspecting and cleaning, 127 critical failures, 146
non-critical failures, 146
Diaphragm seals, 171
C
Calibration E
analog output signal, 138
range, 139 Electric heating, 173
reset, 142 Electrical codes
Certification IEC and CENELEC, 184
CENELEC / LCIE, 186 NEC and CEC, 179
Standards Australia (LOSC), 186 EMC Directive, 13
Zone 2 (Europe) Declaration of Conformity, 187 Enclosure Ratings, 187
Communication errors, 148 Enclosures
Communications IEC classification, 188
request/response format, 7 NEMA standards, 188
starting, 44 Engineering units, 65
transmitter/communicator, 7 pre-programmed, 65
Communicator selecting, 65
connections, 79
connections to transmitter, 43 F
disconnecting, 75
keyboard, 58 Failsafe direction, 105
memory module or data pack, 49 Failure mode alarm
Software compatibility, 41 jumper, 46
viewing/entering device information, 68 Flange adapter
Configuration installing, 33
device information, 68 Flange connections
LRV and URV, 66 description, 32
PV damping, 72 Flange mounted transmitter, 26
PV engineering units, 65 Mounting, 26
PV transfer function (output conformity), 70 Flow engineering units
SV units (meter body temperature), 73 Smart meter, 148
tag number, 64 Flow measurement application, 80
Configuration data Freeze protection, 169
reviewing, 45
Configuration database, 49
Configuration parameter summary, 51
H
Constant-current source mode, 78 HART 5 275 Communicator
Critical failures menu summary, 55
clearing critical failures, 151 HART 6 375 Communicator
menu summary, 57
Hazardous location installation, 37
Hazardous location requirements, 179

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 227
Index -

J Output conformity, 52, 70


selecting, 70
Jumpers Output conformity and smart meter configuration, 148
failsafe direction, 46 Output meter options, 38
repositioning procedure, 105 Output mode, 78

L P
Lightning Protection, 37 Parts identification, 152
Liquid level measurement application, 96 Piping, 29
differential pressure (DP), 85, 87 guidelines, 32
gauge pressure (GP), 90 Poll address, 52, 74, 75
remote diaphragm seals, 96 Potential noise sources, 14
Local smart meter options, 10 Power supply voltage
Local zero and span operating range, 34
adjusting (procedure), 144 Pressure measurement application
Loop wiring, 38 absolute pressure (AP), 93
LRV, 66 differential pressure (DP), 82
keying in, 66 gauge pressure (GP), 90
setting to applied pressure, 67 Pressure ratings, 16
LRV (Lower Range Value), 51 Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)
replacing, 130
Process connections
M summary, 31
Maintenance routines, 127 Process head bolt
Master reset, 151 torque ratings, 130
Meter body PV engineering unit, 51
replacing, 133
Model number R
format, 4
Mounting Recommended spare parts, 171
suggested location, 30 Restore database, 111
Mounting area
considerations, 14
Mounting transmitter
S
bracket mounting, 18 Sealing liquid, 169
flange mounting, 26 SM 3000 smart meter connections, 39
flush mounting, 24 Smart meter
Models STA122, STA922, 21 configuration and output conformity, 148
remote diaphragm seal mounting, 27 configuration using meter pushbuttons, 147
Multidrop mode, 52, 74 engineering units code, 148
error codes, 165
N indications, 164
meter/transmitter interaction, 166
Non-critical failures, 147 selecting engineering units, 149
Nonvolatile memory, 49 setting display of LRV (using meter pushbuttons), 151
setting display of URV (using meter pushbuttons), 155
setting display using HART communicator, 161
O Smart meter display, 47
Operation description, 141
data access, 101 operating conditions and specifications, 143
Operation data, 101 Smart meter option (option SM), 140
failsafe output direction, 104 Software version compatibility, 41
input pressure, 102 Solution Support Center, iv
message (or scratchpad) area, 104 Span, 66, 67
output, 102, 103 Square root dropout, 71
temperature, 104 Square root output, 70
upper and lower range limits, 103 ST 3000 smart transmitter, 2

228 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012
Index -

Start-up, 77 start-up, 77
AP transmitter wiring, 34
pressure measurement application, 93 write protection option, 46
DP transmitter Transmitter models, 5
flow measurement application, 80 Transmitter types, 4
liquid level measurement application, 85, 87 Turndown Ratio, 72
pressure measurement application, 82
DP transmitter (remote seals)
liquid level measurement application, 96
U
GP transmitter URV, 66
liquid level measurement application, 90 keying in, 66
pressure measurement application, 90 setting to applied pressure, 67
Start-up tasks reference, 12 URV (Upper Range Value), 51
Static electricity damage, 105
Status, 103
clearing critical status, 151 V
Steam heating, 174 Vibration sources, 14
Superheated steam considerations, 177

W
T
Wiring transmitter
Tag number, 51, 64 connections, 35
Temperature Limits Working memory, 49
Operating, 14 Write protection option, 105
Three-valve manifold Writing data in the message area, 108
piping, 29
Torque ratings, 130
Transmitter Z
failure mode alarm jumper, 46
Zero and span adjust options, 10
mounting, 17
Zero corrects, 21
operating temperature limits, 14
Zero shift, 21
piping, 29
pressure ratings, 16

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 229
Sales and Service
For application assistance, current specifications, pricing, or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor,
contact one of the offices below.

ASIA PACIFIC EMEA NORTH AMERICA SOUTH AMERICA


(TAC) Honeywell Process Honeywell Process Honeywell do Brasil & Cia
hfs-tac- Solutions, Solutions, Phone: +(55-11) 7266-1900
support@honeywell.com Phone: + 80012026455 or Phone: 1-800-423-9883 FAX: +(55-11) 7266-1905
+44 (0)1202645583
Or 1-800-343-0228
Australia FAX: +44 (0) 1344 655554
Honeywell Limited Email: (Sales)
Phone: +(61) 7-3846 1255 Email: (Sales) Email: (Sales) ask-ssc@honeywell.com
FAX: +(61) 7-3840 6481 sc-cp-apps- ask-ssc@honeywell.com
salespa62@honeywell.com or
Toll Free 1300-36-39-36
or
Toll Free Fax: or (TAC)
1300-36-04-70 (TAC) hfs-tac-
(TAC) hfs-tac- support@honeywell.com
China PRC - Shanghai hfs-tac- support@honeywell.com
Honeywell China Inc. support@honeywell.com
Phone: (86-21) 5257-4568
Fax: (86-21) 6237-2826

Singapore
Honeywell Pte Ltd.
Phone: +(65) 6580 3278
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033

South Korea
Honeywell Korea Co Ltd
Phone: +(822) 799 6114
Fax: +(822) 792 9015

Honeywell Process Solutions


Honeywell 34-ST-25-17
512 Virginia Drive February 2012
Fort Washington, PA 19034 2011 Honeywell International Inc.
www.honeywellprocess.com

Anda mungkin juga menyukai